Chevrolet 1997 Cavalier, Cavalier 1997, 1997 Owner's manual

Chevrolet 1997 Cavalier, Cavalier 1997, 1997 Owner's manual
0 The 1997 Chevrolet Cavalier Owner’s Manual
1-1
Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tells you how touse your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the
“SRS” system.
2-1
Features and Controls
This section explains howto start and operate your Chevrolet.
3-1
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how
to operate your audio system.
4-1
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and
how to drive under different conditions.
5-1
Problems on the Road
This section tells what to doif you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc.
6-1
Service and Appearance Care
Here the manual tellsyou how to keep your Chevrolet running properly and looking good.
7-1
Maintenance Schedule
This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids
and lubricants to use.
8-1
Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you how to contact Chevrolet for assistance and how to get service and owner publications.
It also gives you informationon “Reporting Safety Defects” on page8- 10.
9- 1
Index
Here’s an alphabetical listingof almost every subject in this manual.
You can use it to quickly find
something you wantto read.
i
We support voluntary
technician certification.
GM
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, theGM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the
name CAVALIER are registered trademarksof
General Motors Corporation.
WE SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION THROUGH
National Institute for
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed.We reserve the rightto make changesin the
product after that time without further notice. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motorsof Canada Limited” for Chevrolet
Motor Division wheneverit appears in this manual.
For Canadian OwnersWho Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Please keep this manualin your Chevrolet, so it will be
If you
there if you ever needit when you’re on the road.
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual itinso the new
owner can use it.
Aux propribtaires canadiens:Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en fraqais chez
votre concessionaire ou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1500 Bonhill Rd.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T IC7
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 10273366 €3 €_,t Edition
ii
@Copyright General Motors Corporation1996
All Rights Reserved
The dynamic William C. “Billy”
Durant shified gears frommaking
carriages to making cars,
forming half the team that gave
birth to Chevrolet.
:.. .
I.
3
: :: ...?
..
- .
.LY,.
Louis Chevrolet, the other half of the team,
at the wheel of his experimental “Classic
Six, ’’ which entered production in 1912.
That year 2999 vehicles were produced.
’ +,-;.p
:.
,
’,: .yr%
I
..
:
I
--
In 1932 Chevrolet
introduced the
Synchro-Mesh
transmission and
ofleered a host of
accessories -- including
such niceties as a clock!
I
iv
I
I
1)
1
I
L
,
b!!
The legacy of America's favorite
sportscar
began in 1953, when 319 hand-assembled
white Corvettes
launched the
first use of a
fiberglass
body in
.q
a production car.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.. ..
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
The 1957 Chevy started a romance with the American
public -- and was powered by an available fuel-injected V8.
l
and we are pledgedto
. , ...
...
.,.
- .
make ownership of your
Chevrolet an enjoyable
and rewarding experience.
....
.,
.L .
60's automotive excitement
included Chevrolet landmarks
like the Corvette Sting Ray,
the sporty Camaro, and
powerplants like the
legendary 327 V8.
Your new Chevrolet continues a tradition of quality and value.
V
How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manualfrom beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you
do this, it will help you learn aboutthe features and
controls for your vehicle. Inthis manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words worktogether to explain
things quickly.
A good place to lookfor what you needis the Index in
the back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s
in the manual, andthe page number where you’llfind it.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION totell you
about things that couldhurt you if you wereto ignore
the warning.
vi
These mean thereis something thatcould hurt
you or other people.
In the cautionarea, we tell you whatthe hazard is. Then
we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read thesecautions. If you don’t, you or
others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,’’
“Don’t do this,” or “Don’t
let this happen.”
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also,inthisbookyouwillfind
NOTICE:
the
notice
In area,
we tell
you
about
something
that
can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage
these notices:wouldnotbecovered
by yourwarranty,and it could
be costly. But the notice will tell you what
to do to help
avoid the damage.
These mean thereis something that could
damage your vehicle.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warningsin different colors
or in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels onyour vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTIONor NOTICE.
vii
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbolsyou may find on your vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
A
Q
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:
n
UNLOCK
l a
These symbols
have to do with
your lamps:
TURN
SIGNALS
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMP
e
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
BRAKE
BURNS
-k
FUSE
t
h
I-1
LIGHTER
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
POWER
WINDOW
,\I/,
AIR BAG
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
0p
p
\
FOG LAMPS
#0
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
t
'
(a)
HORN
R
COOLANT
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
SPEAKER
)a(
b
e, p3
(e)
FUEL
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your Chevrolet and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also
learn about some things you should nut do with air bags and safetybelts.
1-2
1-7
1-12
1-13
1-13
1-21
1-22
1-22
1-28
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re forEveryone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts -- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Rear Seat Passengers
1-31
1-33
1-35
1-37
1-45
1-48
1-48
1-48
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults
Center Passenger Position
Children
Child Restraints
Larger Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash
1-1
Seats r---d Seat Controls
This section tells you about the seats-- how to
adjust them -- and also about reclining seatbacks and
head restraints.
Manual Front Seats
A CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the
vehicle is
moving. The suddenmovement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal whenyou
don’t want to. Adjust thedriver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Lift the lever on the front of the driver’s seat to unlock
it. Slide the seat to where you want it. Then
release the
lever and try to move the seat with your body,
to make
sure the seat is locked intoplace.
Your Cavalier will be equipped with one of the
following passenger seat adjusters.
Slide the lever under the passenger'sseat to the right to
unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it.Then
release the lever and tryto move the seat with your
body, to make sure the seat is lockedinto place.
If your Cavalier is equipped with easy-entryseats, this is
your front passenger seat adjuster. Pull up on the lever at
the front of the passenger's seat to unlock it. Slide the
seat to a comfortable position. Thenrelease the lever
and try to move the seat with your body,to make sure
the seat is lockedinto place.
Manual Lumbar Support (If Equipped)
The manual lumbar support controlis located at the
front of the driver's seat, toward the right. Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease
the amount of supportto your lower back.
1-3
Reclining Front Seatbacks
I
To adjust the seatback,lift the lever on the outerside of
the seat andmove the seatback to whereyou want it.
Release the lever to lock the seatback.Pull up on the
lever and the seat will
go to an upright position.
But don't have a seatback reclined
if your vehicle is moving.
Sitting ina reclined position whenyour vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even
if you buckle
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-4
.
.
Seatback Latches (2-Door Models)
up, your safety belts can’t
do their jobwhen
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t doits job because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neckor other injuries.
The lap belt can’tdo its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would bethere, not at your pelvic bones.
This could causeserious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle inis
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.
Head Restraints
The front seatback folds
forward to let peopleget
into the back seat.
To fold a front seatback forward, lift thelatch located on
the lower back side of the seatback. Then the seat will
fold forward.
When you return the seatback to its original position,
make sure the seatback islocked. The latch must be
down for the seat to work properly.
Slide the headrestraint up or downso that the top of the
restraint is closest to the topof your ears. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
1-5
Easy Entry Seat (If Equipped)
Rear Seats
Folding theRear Seat
If an easy entry right front seat isn’t locked,
it
can move. In a sudden
stop or crash, the person
sitting there couldbe injured. After you’ve used
it, be sure to push rearward on an easy entry seat
to be sure it is locked.
On some two-door models, the right front seat
of your
vehicle makesit easy to get in and out
of the rear seat.
Tilt the right front seatback completely forward and
the whole seat will slide forward.
Move the right front seatback to its original position
after someone gets into the rear seat area. Then move To open the fold-down rearseat, pull forwardon the
seat tab.
the seat rearward untilit locks.
Tilt the seatback completely forward again to get out.
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how
to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you shouldnot do
with safety belts.
And it explains the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS),
or air bag system.
I
To close the seat, push the seatback up to its
original position.
Check to ensure the seatback is in itsoriginal position
and securelylatched by pulling forward on the top
of the seatback. Move any obstructions in the
trunk compartment.
A CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where heor she can’t wear
a safety belt properly.If you are in acrash and
your injuries
you’re not wearing a safety belt,
can bemuch worse. You can hit things insidethe
vehicle or be ejected from it.You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might
not be if you are buckled up. Always fastenyour
safety belt,and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properly too.
1-7
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says
to
wear safety belts. Here’s why:
They work.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in
a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are morelikely to be
seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow peopleto
ride in any areaof your vehicle that isnot
equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure
everyone in yourvehicle is in a seat andusing a
safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light that
comes on as a reminder to
buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light”
in the Index.)
You never knowif you’ll be in a crash. If youdo have a
crash, you don’t knowif it will be a bad one.
A few crashesare mild, and some crashes can be
so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many
of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than25 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling does
up
matter ... a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride inor on anything, yougo as fast as
it goes.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose just
it’s a seaton wheels.
Put someone on it.
1-9
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn't stop.
1-10
The person keeps going until stoppedby something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
or the instrument panel ...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as thevehicle does.
You get more timeto stop. You stop over moredistance,
and your strongest bones take theforces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-11
Here Are Questions Many People Ask @’
About Safety Belts-- and the Answers
A:
&: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident ifI’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be -- whether you’re wearinga safety
belt or not. But you can unbucklea safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your
chance of
being consciousduring and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if
you are beltec.
@
If my vehicle has air bags, why should
I have to
wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will
be in mostof them in the future. But they are
supplemental systemsonly; so they work with
safety belts-- not insteadof them. Everyair bag
system ever offered for sale has required the useof
safety belts. Evenif you’re ina vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only frontal
in
collisions,
but especially in side and othercollisions.
If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re inan
accident -- even one that isn’t yourfault -- you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being
a good driver
doesn’t protect youfrom things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest numberof serious injuries
and deaths occur at speedsof less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that thereare special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules for
smaller children and babies.
If a child will be riding in
your Chevrolet, see the partof this manual called
“Children.” Follow those rulesfor everyone’s protection,
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driverhas a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s howto wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can sit up straight.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lockif you pull the belt acros
you very quickly. Ifthis happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the beltacross you
more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1-13
1
If the belt stops before it reaches
the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle
the belt.
Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough,see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make surethe release buttonon the buckle is
positioned so you wouldbe able to unbuckle the
safety beltauickly if you ever had to.
1-14
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should beworn low and snug on
the hips,just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid underit, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries.The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locksif there’s a sudden stopor crash, or
if you pull the belt very quickly out
of the retractor.
1-15
-
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster(4-hOr Models)
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height thatis right for you.
To move it down, squeeze the release button and move
the adjuster to the desired position.
You can move the
adjuster upjust by pushing up on the shoulder belt
to where you wantit,
guide, After you move the adjuster
:on
try to move it down without squeezing the release but!
to make sure it has locked into position.
Adjust the heightso that the shoulder portionof the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be
away from yourface and neck, but not falling
off
your shoulder.
&= What's wrong with this?
You can be seriously hurt jour shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash,
you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt shouldfit against yourbody.
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose.It won't give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-17
&:
What's wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrongplace likethis. In a crash,
the belt would goup over your abdomen. The
belt forceswould be there, not at thepelvic
bones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
@
What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm.
In a crash, your
body would move too far forward,which would
increase the chanceof head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply toomuch force to the
ribs, which aren’tas strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severelyinjure internal organs
like your liver or spleen.
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-19
&:
What’s wrong with this?
t-t-
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
You can be seriously injured bya twisted belt. In
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the
belt to spread impact forces.If a beltis twisted,
make it straightso it can work properly, or ask
your dealerto fix it.
Safety BeltUse During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are morelikely to be
seriously
- injured if they don’t wear
safety belts.
. ..
To unlatch the belt, just push thebutton on the buckle.
The belt shouldgo back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the beltis out of the
way. If you slamthe door on it, you can damage both the
belt andyour vehicle.
A pregnant woman should weara lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-21
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that thefetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women,as for anyone, the keyto making
safety belts effectiveis wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt.See “Driver Position,”
earlier in this section.
Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS)
This part explains the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)or air bag system.
Your Chevrolet has twoair bags -- one air bag for the
driver and another air bagfor theright front passenger.
Here are the most importantthings to know aboutthe air
bag system:
1-22
You can be severelyinjured or killed ina crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
during a
crash helps reduce your chance
of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejectedfrom it. Air
bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety
belts. All air bags are designed to work with
safety belts,but don’t replace ‘them.Air bags are
designed to work only inmoderate to severe
crashes where the front of your vehicle hits
something. Theyaren’t designed to inflate at all
in rollover, rear, sideor low-speed frontal
a
crashes. Everyone in your vehicle should wear
safety beltproperly whether or not there’s an
air bag for that person.
--
--
A CAUTION:
Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you’re tooclose to an inflating
air bag, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts
help keep you in position beforeand duringa
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with air
far back as possible
bags. The driver should sit as
while still maintaining controlof the vehicle.
A CAUTION:
AIR
BAG
There is an air bagreadiness
light on the instrument
panel, which shows
AIR BAG.
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.
An inflating air bag canseriously injure small
children. Always secure children properlyin your
vehicle. To read how, see the partof this manual
called ‘cChildren”and the caution label on the
right frontpassenger’s safety belt.
1-23
How the Air Bag System Works
I
I
The right front passenger’s air bagis in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
Where arethe air bags?
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel.
If something is between an occupant and an air
bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into
that person. The path
of an inflating air bag must
be kept clear. Don’t
put anything between an occupant and an air
bag, and don’t attachor put anything on the
steering wheel hub oron or near any other air
bag covering.
When should an air bag inflate?
An air bag is designed to inflatein a moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate
only if the impact speed
is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight
into a
wall that doesn’t moveor deform, the threshold level is
about 9 to 15 mph (14 to 24 km/h). The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design,
so that
it can be somewhat aboveor below this range.If your
vehicle strikes something that will move
or deform, such
as a parked car, the thresholdlevel will be higher.The
air bag is not designed to inflatein rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant.
In any particular crash,no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damag
to a vehicleor because of what the repaircosts were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and
how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal
or
near-frontal impacts.
What makes an air bag inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, theair bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash.
The sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related
hardware are all part ofthe air bag modules inside the
steering wheel and in the instrument panel front
in of
the rightfront passenger.
1-25
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the
instrument panel.Air bags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts.Air bags distribute the forceof
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags would
not help you in many types of collisions, including
rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motionis not toward those air bags.Air
bags should neverbe regarded as anything more than a
supplement to safety belts,and then only in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal collisions.
When an airbag inflates, thereis dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma
or other
breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get outas soon as it is safe to doso.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
What will you see afteran air bag inflates?
In many crashes severe enoughto inflate anair bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates,so quickly
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the
that some people may not even realize the air bag
right
front
passenger
air
bag.
inflated. Some componentsof the air bag module in the
steering wheel hubfor the driver’s air bag,or the
Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag, will inflate, you’ll need some new parts
for your air bag
be hotfor a short time.The parts of the bag that come
system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system
into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to
won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.
touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming from
A new system will include air bag modules and
vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t
possibly other parts.The service manual for your
prevent the driver from seeing
or from being able to
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
steer the vehicle, nor does
it stop people from leaving
the vehicle.
0
0
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module, which records information
about the air bag system. The module records
information about the readiness of the system,
when the sensors are activated and driver’s safety
belt usage at deployment.
Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
system. Improper service can mean that your air
bag system won’t work properly.See your dealer
for service.
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the
right frontpassenger’s air bag, the bagmay not
work properly. You may have to replace the air
bag module in the steering wheel or both air
the
bag module and the instrument panel for the
right frontpassenger’s air bag. Do not open or
break the air bag
coverings.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Chevrolet
Air bags affect how your
Chevrolet should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag system inseveral places
around your vehicle.You don’t want the systemto
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
Chevrolet dealer and the Cavalier Service Manual have
information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag
system. To purchase a service manual, see “Service and
Owner Publications’’ inthe Index.
A C.”UTION:
For up to10 minutes after theignition key is
turned off and the batteryis disconnected, an air
bag can still inflate during improper
service. You
can be injured if you are close to an air bag
when
it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape
or yellow connectors. Theyare probably partof
the air bagsystem. Be sure tofollow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work foryou is qualified to doso.
The air bag systemdoes nor need regular maintenance.
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often incrashes than those whoare
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’tsafety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they canstrike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety
belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wearone properly.
The shoulder belt may lock
if you pull the belt across
you very quickly.If this happens, let the beltgo back
slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt acrossyou
more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.
If the belt stops beforeit reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate andkeep pulling until youcan buckle it.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull downon the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up
on the shoulder part.
Pull up on the latch plate to makesure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at theend of this section. Make sure the
release button on the buckle is positionedso you
would be ableto unbuckle the safety belt quicklyif
you ever hadto.
1-29
force to the strong pelvicbones. And you'd be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid underit, the
belt would applyforce at your abdomen.This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder andacross the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety beltlocks if there's a sudden stop or a crash,
or if youpull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
/r\ CAUTION:
The lap part of the belt shouldbe worn low andsnug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
You can be seriously hurtif your shoulder beltis
too loose.In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.
I
To unlatch the belt,just push the buttonon the buckle.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guidesfor
Children and Small Adults
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfortfor children whohave outgrown
child restraints andfor small adults.When installed on a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide pulls
the belt away
from the neck and head.
1-31
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt.The elastic
cord must be under the belt.Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the
two edges of the belt into
the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the beltis not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide
on top.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges togetherso that you can take themout from
the guides. Pull the guide upward
to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guideonto the clip. Rotate the
guide and clip inward andin between the seatback
and the interior body, leaving
only the loop of elastic
cord exposed.
Center Passenger Position
U
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in “RearSeat Outside Passenger Positions”
earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
Lap Belt
1
To make the belt shorter, pull
its free end as shown until
the beltis snug.
When you sit in the center seating position, you have a
Buckle, position and releaseit the sameway as thelap
lap safety belt, which has
no retractor. To make the belt
part of a lap-shoulder belt.If the belt isn’t long enough,
longer, tilt the latch plate and pullit along the belt.
see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end
of this section.
Make sure the release button
on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
1-34
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection!That includes
infants and all children smaller than adult size. In fact,
the law in every state inthe United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
Smaller Children and Babies
ACAUTION:
A very young child’ship bones are so small that a
regular belt mightnot stay low on the hips, as it
should. Instead, the belt will likely be over
the
child’s abdomen.In a crash, the belt would apply
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause serious or fatal injuries. So, be sure that
any child small enough for one is always properly
restrained in a childor infant restraint.
Smaller children and babies should always be
restrained in a child or infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraint will say whether
it is the right type and size for your child.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-35
CAUTION: (Continued]
heavy you can’t holdit. For example, ina crash
at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-110. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly becomea 240-1b. (110 kg) force on
your arms. The baby would be almost impossible
to hold.
Secure the baby inan infant restraint.
a
I
Never hold a baby in your arms
while riding ina
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a
crash. During a crash a baby will become so
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
Child Restraints
Be sure the child restraint is designed to be used ina
vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it meets
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or ina
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.
The instructions that come with the infant or child
restraint will show you how todo that.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show thatchildren are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We at
General Motors therefore recommend that you put your
child restraint in the rear seat. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here’s why:
’ A CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured if the right frontpassenger’s
air bag inflates. This is because the backof a
rear-facing child restraintwould be very close
to
the inflating air
bag. Always secure a rear-facing
child restraint in the rearseat.
You may, however, secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right frontseat. Beforeyou secure
a forward-facing child restraint, alwaysmove the
front passenger seatas far back as it will go. Or,
secure the child restraint
in the rearseat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people
in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no childis in it.
1-37
Top Strap
like that in your vehicle because the top strap anchor
cannot be installed properly. You shouldn’t use this type
of restraint without anchoringthe top strap.
If your vehicle is nota convertible and you needto have
an anchor installed, you can ask your Chevrolet
dealer to
put one infor you. If you want to install an anchor
yourself, yourdealer can tell you how to do
it.
Canadian lawrequires that child restraints have a top
strap, and that thestrap be anchored.
If your childrestraint has a top strap, your dealer can
obtain a kit with anchor hardware andinstallation
instructions specifically designed for this vehicle.The
dealer can then install the anchorfor you. In Canada,
this work will bedone for you free of charge. Or, you
may install the anchor yourself using the
instructions
provided in thekit.
If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be
anchored. If you havea convertible, don’t use a restraint
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
U
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
1. Put the restraint on theseat. Follow the instructions
for thechild restraint.
2. Secure the child in thechild restraint as the
instructions say.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safetybelt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Tilt thelatch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
If the shoulder belt goes infront of the child’s face or
neck, putit behind the child restraint.
1-39
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is
positioned so you would be ableto unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
1-40
5. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while
you push down on the child restraint.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sureit is secure.
To remove the child restraint,
just unbuckle the vehicle's
safety belt and letit go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work
for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Rear Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap belt.
See the earlier part about thetop strap if the child
restraint has one.
1. Make the belt as long as possibleby tilting the latch
plate and pullingit along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for thechild restraint.
3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
4. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure itis secure. If it isn’t, secure the
restraint in a different place inthe vehicle and
contact the child restraint maker
for their advice
about howto attach thechild restraint properly.
To remove the childrestraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready work
to for an adult or larger
child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
5. Buckle the belt. Make surethe release button is
positioned so you would be ableto unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
6. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint.
U
Your vehicle hasa right front passenger air bag.Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:
A child ina rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured if the right front passenger’s
air bag inflates. This
is because the back ofa
rear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to
the inflating air bag. Always secure
a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat.
You’ll beusing the lap-shoulder belt. See theearlier part
about the topstrap if the child restraint has one.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air
bag, always move theseat as far back as it willgo
before securing a fonvard-facing child restraint. (See
“Seats” in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
4. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safetybelt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Tilt thelatch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
If the shoulder belt goes infront of the child’s face o
neck, put it behind thechild restraint.
5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is
positioned so you would be ableto unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
6. To tighten the belt, pull upon the shoulder belt while
you push down on the child restraint.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sureit is secure.
To remove the child restraint,
just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and letit goback all theway. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work an
foradult
or larger child passenger.
1-44
Larger Children
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
Accident statistics show that children are saferif they
are restrained in the rear seat. But they needto use the
safety belts properly.
Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrownout in
a crash.
0
Children who aren’t buckledup can strike other
people who are.
Children whohave outgrown child restraints should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-45
Never do this.
Here two childrenare wearing the samebelt. The
belt can’t properlyspread the impactforces. In a
crash, the two children can
be crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must be used by
only one personat a time.
What if a child is wearinga lap-shoulder belt,
belt is
but thechild isso small that the shoulder
very close to the child’s face or neck?
A:
1-46
Move the child toward the center
of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt
still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
If the
would have the restraint that belts provide.
child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,
see
“Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides” in the Index.
If the childis so small thatthe shoulder beltis still
very closeto the child’s faceor neck, you might
want to place the child in the center seat position,
the one that has onlya lap belt.
Never do this.
Here a childis sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder partis behind
the child. If the child wears the belt in this
way, in
a crash thechild might slideunder the belt. The
belt’s force would then be appliedright on the
child’s abdomen. Thatcould cause seriousor
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should beworn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs.This applies beltforce to the child’s
pelvic bonesin a crash.
1-47
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around
you, you
should useit.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough
to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you
go
in to orderit, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the
extender will be long enough
for you. The extender will
be just for you, andjust for the seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use
it, and useit
only for the seatit is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it
to the regular safety belt.
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash,do you need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would if
beworn
during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.
If belts are cutor damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need
to have safety belt
or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs
may be necessary evenif the belt wasn’t being used at
the time of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll needto replace air bag
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light system parts.See the part on theair bag system earlier in
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and this section.
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts.
If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts maynot protect you in a
crash. Theycan rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is
torn or frayed, get a new
one right away.
Also lookfor any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repairedor replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
0 Section 2
Features and Controls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your Chevrolet, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is
working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.
2-2
2-4
2-6
2-10
2-10
2-1 1
2-12
2-12
2- 14
2- 17
2-18
2-23
2-26
2-27
2-29
Keys
Door Locks
Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)
Trunk
Theft
Passlock
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Manual Transaxle Operation
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic
Transaxle Models Only)
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
(Automatic Transaxle)
2-30
2-30
2-3 1
2-32
2-33
2-4 1
2-44
2-46
2-48
2-5 1
2-5 1
2-62
2-67
Parking Over Things That Bum
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
(Automatic Transaxle)
Windows
Turn Signalhlultifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Sunroof (If Equipped)
Convertible Top (If Equipped)
The Instrument Panel -- Your
Information System
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
2-1
Keys
A CAUTION:
Leaving young children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many reasons.
A child or others could
be badly injured or
even killed.
They could operate power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. Don't
leave the keys in a vehicle with young children.
2-2
~~
.
.
.
One key is forthe
ignition, the doors
and all other locks.
I NOTICE:
Your Chevrolet has a number of new features
that can help prevent theft. But you can have a
lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you eve
lock your keys inside. You mayeven haveto
damage your vehicleto get in. So be sure you
have extra keys.
When a new Chevrolet is delivered, the dealer removes
the key tag fromthe key, andgives it to the first owner.
Each tag has a code on it that tells your dealer or a
qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keepthe
tag in a safe place. If you lose your key, you'll be ableto
have a new one made easily using the tag.
2-3
Use your key to unlock your vehicle from
the outside.
You can also use the optional remote KeylessEntry
System to unlockyour vehicle.
Door Locks
A CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers especially children can easily
open the doors and fall
out. When a door is
locked, the insidehandle won’t open it.
Outsiders caneasily enter through anunlocked
door when you slow down or stop yourvehicle.
This may not beso obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown outof the vehicle in a
crash if the doors aren’tlocked. Wear safety belts
properly, lock your doors,and you will befar
better off whenever you drive yourvehicle.
--
To lock the door from the
inside, push the locking
lever forward.
--
There are several waysto lock and unlock your vehicle.
To unlock the door, pull the locking lever backward.
Power Door Locks(If Equipped)
Rear Door Security Lock(4-DOOr Models)
Your Chevrolet is equipped
with rear door security
locks that help prevent
passengers from opening
the rear doors of your car
from the inside.
You can lock or unlock all
doors of your vehicle from
the driver’s or passenger’s
door lock switch.
Push the lower portion of the switch to lock yourdoors.
Push the upper portionof the switch to unlock
your doors.
The leveron each rear door works onlythat door’s lock.
It won’t lock (or unlock)all of the doors -- that’s a
safety feature.
To use one of these locks:
1. Use a key to move the lock all the way up.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock.
The rear doors of your vehiclecannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use. If you wantto
open a rear door when the security lockis on:
1. Unlock the door from the inside.
2. Then open the door from the outside.
2-5
If youdon’t cancel the security lock feature, adults or
older children who ride in the rear won’tbe able to open
the rear door from the inside. You should let adults and
older children know how to cancel the locks.unlockyourdoors
To cancel the rear door lock:
keyless
entry
transmitter
supplied
with
your
vehicle.
1. Unlock thedoor from the inside and open the door
from the outside.
2. Use a key to move the lock all the way down.
3. Do the samefor the other rear door.
The rear door locks will now work normally.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving thevehicle, open your door and
set the locks from the inside. Then get out and close
the door.
Keyless Entry Ss;
_ _
(If Equipped)
If your Chevrolet has this option, you can lock and
or unlockyourtrunkfromabout
3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote
In addition, the systemilluminates the interior lights for
a set period of time. The remote Keyless EntrySystem
consists of a receiver, whichis located in the vehicle,
and two hand held transmitters.
Your Keyless Entry
System operates on a
radio frequency subjectto
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry and
Science Canada.
This device complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules.
If you’re still having trouble, see your Chevrolet
dealer or a qualified technician for service.
Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
(2) this device must acceptany interference received,
authorized service facility could void authorization to
including interference that may cause undesired operation. use this equipment.
This device complies with RSS-2 10 of Industry and
Operation
Science Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
The following functions are available with the remote
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
keyless entry system:
interference received, including interference that may
LOCK: All doors will automatically lock when the
cause undesired operation of the device.
LOCK button on thetransmitter is pressed. The interior
This system has a range of about 3 feet (1 m) up to
lamps stay on for two seconds after all of the doors
30 feet (9 m). At times you may notice a decrease in
are closed.
range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry
UNLOCK: The driver’s door will unlock automatically
system. If the transmitter does not work or if you have
when the UNLOCK button onthe transmitter is
to stand closer to your vehicle for thetransmitter to
pressed. If the UNLOCK button is pressed again
work, try this:
within five seconds, all remaining doors will unlock.
Check to determine if battery replacement or
The interior lamps will stayon for 40 seconds or until
resynchronization is necessary. See the instructions
the ignition is turned on.
that follow.
Trunk Release: The trunk will unlockanytime the
Check the distance.You may be too far from your
vehicle symbol on the transmitter is pressed andthe
vehicle. You may needto stand closer during rainy
ignition is off. The interior lamps will come on for
or snowy weather.
40 seconds or until the ignition switch is turned on.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Takea few steps to the left or right,
hold the transmitter higher,and try again.
Matching Transmitter(s)To Your Vehicle
Battery Replacement
Each remote keylessentry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking yourvehicle.
If a transmitter is lostor stolen,a replacement canbe
purchased through yourdealer. Remember to bring any
remaining transmitters with you when you goto your
dealer. When thedealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched.Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter,the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have only two transmitters
matched to it.
Under normal use,the battery in yourremote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can match yourtransmitter to as many 1997
General Motors vehiclesas you own, as longas they
have the same remote Keyless Entry System.Contact
your dealer for assistance with this.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have to
get close to your vehiclebefore the transmitter works,
it’s probably time tochange the battery.
I
NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care to
nottouch
any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter.
3. Read the instructions inside the case.
Replacing the Battery in the Keyless Entry
System Transmitter
I
4. Put the two halves back together. Make surethe
cover is on tightly,so water won’t get in.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter with your
vehicle. If the transmitter does not work, try
synchronizing the transmitter with the receiver.
~
Synchronization
Your remote Keyless Entry Systemis equipped with a
security system that prevents anyone from recording and
playing back your signal. Thetransmitter does not send
the same signal twice to the receiver. The receiver will
not respond toa signal that has been sent to
it more
than once.
To resynchronize your transmitter and receiver, follow
these directions:
To replace the battery inthe transmitter:
1. Stand close to your vehicle,
1. Use a small coin or flathead screwdriver to separate
the bottom half from the top half of the transmitter.
2. Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on
the transmitter at the same time,
2. Remove the battery and replace it with the new one.
Make sure the positive (+) side of the battery faces
down. For battery replacement, use a 3 volt battery,
type CR2032, or equivalent.
3. Hold the buttons for at least five seconds. During
this time, the doors should lock and unlock once.
This confirms theresynchronization. If the doors do
not lock and unlock,see your dealer for service.
2-9
Trunk
It canbe dangerous to drive with the trunk
lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come intoyour vehicle. You can’t seeor smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousnessand even death.
If you must drive with the trunk
lid openor if
electrical wiring or other cableconnections must
pass through theseal betweenthe body and the
trunk lid:
Make sure all windows are shut.
Turn the fanon your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed withthe setting
on any airflow selection except
MAX. That
will force outsideair into yourvehicle. See
“Comfort Controls” in the Index.
If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all theway.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
Remote Trunk Release (If Equipped)
Pull upward on the remote
release handle, located on
the floor near theleft side of
the driver’s seat, to release
the trunk lid.
Theft
Vehicle theft is big business, especiallyin some cities.
Although your Chevrolet hasa number of theft-deterrent
features, weknow that nothing we put on can
it make it
impossible to steal. However, there are ways youcan help.
Key in the Ignition
Passlock
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy targetfor joyriders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.
When you park yourChevrolet and open the driver’s
door, you’ll heara chime reminding you to remove your
key from theignition and take it with you. Always do
this. Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will
your ignition. If you have an automatictransaxle, taking
your key out also locks your transaxle. And remember
to lockthe doors.
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Passlock
theft-deterrent system.
Parking at Night
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them ina storage area, or take them with you.
Parking Lots
If you park in a lot where someone will be watching
your vehicle, it’s best tolock it up and take your keys.
But what if youhave to leave your key? What if you
have to leave something valuable in your vehicle?
0 Put your valuables in a storage area, like your trunk
or glove box.
Lock the glove box.
0 Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
TM
Passlock is a passive theft-deterrent system. The system is
armed once the key is removed from the ignition. Passlock
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned witha
valid key. If a correct key is not used, fuel is disabled.
’
During normal operation, the THEFT SYSTEMlight
will go off after the engine is started. If the engine stalls
and the THEFT SYSTEM light flashes, wait untilthe
light stops flashing before tryingto restart the engine.
Remember torelease the key from the START position
as soon as the engine starts. If you are dnving and the
THEFT SYSTEM light comeson, you will be ableto
restart the engine if you turn the engine off. However,
your Passlocksystem is not working properly and must
be serviced by your dealer.Your vehicle is not protected
by Passlock at this time. You may also want to check the
fuses (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index).
See your Chevrolet dealer for service.
If the THEFT SYSTEMlight comes on whilethe engine
is running, a problem has been detected and
the system
may need service. See your dealer for service.
In an emergency, call theChevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center at 1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872).
2-11
Ignition Positions
New Vehicle “Break-In”
C
NOTICE:
Your modern Chevrolet doesn’t need
an
elaborate “break-in.” But it will perform better
in the long run if you follow these guidelines:
0 Don’t drive at any one speed fast or
slow for the first500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
0 Avoid making hard stops for the
first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops withnew linings can mean
premature wear and earlierreplacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
0 Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
See “Towinga Trailer” in the Index for
more information.
--
--
A
E
With the ignition key in the ignition switch, you can turn
the switch tofive positions:
ACCESSORY (A): This is an on position in which you
can operate your electrical power accessories. Press in
the ignition switchas you turn the topof it toward you.
LOCK (B): This is the only position in which you can
remove the key. This locks your steering wheel, ignition
and transaxle.
OFF (C): This position unlocks the steering wheel,
ignition and transaxle, but does not sendelectrical
power to anyaccessories. In the OFF position, the
instrument cluster and the automatic transaxle gear shift
indicator have electrical power. Use this position if your
vehicle must be pushedor towed, but never try to
push-start your vehicle. A warning chime will sound if
you openthe driver’s door when the ignition is off and
the key is in the ignition.
On manual transaxlevehicles, turning thekey to
LOCK will lock the steering columnand resultin
a loss of ability to steer the
vehicle. This could
cause a collision. If you need to turn theengine
off while the vehicle ismoving, turn thekey only
to OFF. Don’t press the key release button while
the vehicle ismoving.
RUN (D): This is an on position to which the switch
returns after you start your engine and release the
switch. The switch stays in the RUN position when the
engine is running. But even when the engine is not
running, you can use RUN to operate your electrical
power accessories, and to display some instrument panel
warning lights.
NOTICE:
START (E): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will
return to RUN fornormal driving.
If your key seems stuck in LOCK and
you can’t
Note that even if the engine is not running, the positions
ACCESSORY and RUNare on positions that allow you
to operate your electrical accessories, such as the radio.
~
turn it, be sureyou are using the correctkey; if
so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and rightwhile you turn the
key hard. But turn the
key only with your hand.
Using a tool to force it couldbreak thekey or the
ignition switch.If none of this works, then your
vehicle needs service.
Key Release Button (Manual Transaxle)
The ignition key cannot be
removed from the ignition
unless the key release
button is used.
Starting Your Engine
Automatic Transaxle
Move your shift leverto PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position
-- that’s a
safety feature.To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
I NOTICE:
To remove the key, turn the key to O
theW position.
While pressing the key release button in, turn the key to
the LOCK position. Pull the key straight out.
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your Chevrolet
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transaxle. Shift toPARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transaxle
The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL (N). Hold the
clutch pedal to thefloor and start the engine.Your
vehicle won’t start if the clutch pedal
is not all theway
down -- that’s a safety feature.
Starting Your 2.2 Liter Engine
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed willgo down as your
engine gets warm.
r
I NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your batteryto be
drained muchsooner. Andthe excessive heat can
damage your startermotor.
2. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold thekey in
START for about three seconds.If the vehicle starts
briefly but thenstops again, do the same thing, but
this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designedto work with the
electronics in yourvehicle. If you add electrical
parts oraccessories, you could change theway
the engineoperates. Before adding electrical
If you don’t,
equipment, check with your dealer.
your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have yourvehicle towed, see
the partof this manual thattells how to do it
without damaging yourvehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle’’ in the Index.
Starting Your 2.4 Liter Engine
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
you hold the key in
floor and holding it there as
START for about three seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine. If the vehicle starts briefly
but then stopsagain, do the same thing, but this time
keep the pedal aboutone-quarter of the way down
for fiveor six seconds.
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed willgo down as your
engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
I
Holding yourkey in START for lon&!r than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be
drained muchsooner. And theexcessive heat can
damage your startermotor.
2. If it doesn’t start right away, and if the weather is
very cold (below-20” F or -29” C), push the
accelerator pedal about one-quarter of the way down
while you turn the key to START. Do this until the
engine starts. As soon as itdoes, let go of the key.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline.
I
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to
work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts oraccessories, you could change theway
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your
dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might notperform properly.
If you ever have to have your vehicle
towed, see
the partof this manual thattells how to doit
without damaging yourvehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
Engine Coolant Heater(If Equipped)
2.4L Engine
2.2L Engine
In very cold weather, 0°F (-18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You'll get easier starting and
better fuel economy duringengine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged ina minimum of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
2-17
To Use the Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
I
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store
the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving
engine parts.If you don’t, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your Chevrolet dealer in the area where you’ll be
parking your vehicle.The dealer can give youthe best
advice for that particular area.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Your Chevrolet may be equipped with a three-speed
automatic or a four-speed automatic transaxle.The
shift leveris located on the console between the seats.
There are six different positions for the shift lever on the
three-speed automatic and seven positions
for the
four-speed automatic transaxles. WhilePARK (P),
REVERSE (R)and NEUTRAL(N) operate identically
for both transaxles, the forward
gear positions represent
different gearing and operation.See “Forward Gears
(3-Speed)” or “Forward-Gears (4-Speed)” later in
this section.
PARK (P): This locks your front wheels. It’s the best
position to use when you start your engine because your
vehicle can’t move easily.
A CAUTION:
Three-Speed Automatic Transaxle
P
N D 3 2 1
8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Four-Speed Automatic Transaxle
It is dangerous to get out
of your vehicleif the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle whenthe engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or others couldbe injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even whenyou’re on fairly
level ground, alwaysset your parking brake and
(P).
move the shift lever to PARK
See “ShiftingInto PARK (P)” in the Index. If
you’re pulling a trailer, see“Towing a Trailer” in
the Index.
Ensure the shift leveris fully in PARK (P) range before
starting the engine.Your Chevrolet has a brake-transaxle
shift interlock. You have to fullyapply your regular
brakes before you can shift fromPARK (P) when the
ignition key is in the
RUN position. If you cannot shift
out of PARK (P),ease pressure on the shift lever
-- push
the shift lever all the way into PARK(P) and also release
the shift lever button on floor shift console models
as you
maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever
into the gear you
wish. (Press the shift lever button before
moving the shift lever.) See “Shifting Out
of PARK (P)”
in the Index.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
I NOTICE:
Shifting to REVERSE(R) while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage your transaxle.
Shift to REVERSE(R) only after yourvehicle
is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back andforth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle,see “If
You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,Ice or Snow” in the Index.
2-20
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels.To restart when you’re
already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicleis being towed.
Shifting outof PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while
your engine is “racing”(running athigh speed) is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit peopleor
objects. Don’t shiftout of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N)while your engine is racing.
I NOTICE:
Damage toyour transaxle causedby shifting out
of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine
racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
Forward Gears (3-Speed)
DRIVE (D): This position is fornormal driving.
SECOND (2): This position gives youmore power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you wouldalso want to use
your brakes off and on.
NOTICE:
Don’t drive in SECOND(2) for more than
25 miles (41 km), or atspeeds over55 mph
(88 k d h ) , o ryou can damage your transaxle.
Use DRIVE (D) as much as possible. Don’t shift
into SECOND(2) unless you are going slower
than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can damage
your engine.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power (bu
lower fuel economy) than SECOND(2). You can use it on
lf the selector
very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
lever is put in F’IRST (l),the transaxle won’tshift into
fist gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
NOTICE:
If your frontwheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happenif you were stuck in
a solid
very deep sand or mud or were up against
object. You could damage your transaxle.Also,
if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your
vehicle there with onlythe accelerator pedal. This
could overheat and damage the transaxle.
Use
your brakes or shift into
PARK (P)to hold your
vehicle in position on ahill.
2-21
Forward Gears (4-Speed)
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):This position is for
normal driving with the four-speed automatic transaxle.
If you need more powerfor passing, and you’re:
Going less than about35 mph (56 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal abouthalfway down.
Going about 35 mph (56 h/h)
push
, your
accelerator all the way down.
THIRD (3): This position is alsoused for normal
driving, however, itoffers more power and lowerfuel
economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D). Here
are some timesyou might choose THIRD (3) instead of
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE(D):
0 When driving on hilly, winding roads.
0
When going down a steep hill.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND(2) on hills.
It can helpcontrol your speed as yougo down steep
mountain roads, but then you wouldalso want to use
your brakesoff and on.
I
NOTICE:
Don’t drive in SECOND(2) for more than
25 miles (41 km), or at speeds over 55 mph
(88 km/h), or you can damage your transaxle.
Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) or
THIRD (3) as much as possible. Don’t shift into
SECOND (2) unless you are going slower than
65 mph (105 km/h),or you can damage
your engine.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power (but
lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2).You can use it on
very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.If the selector
lever is put in FIRST (l),the transaxle won’t shift into
fxst gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Manual Transaxle Operation
I NOTICE:
If your frontwheels can’t rotate, don’ttry to
if you were stuck in
drive. This might happen
very deep sandor mud orwere up againsta solid
object. You could damage your transaxle.
Also,
if you stop when going uphill, don’thold your
vehicle there with only the acceleratorpedal. This
could overheat and damage the transaxle.
Use
your brakesor shift intoPARK (P) to hold your
vehicle in position on a hill.
:
This is your shift pattern.
2-:
Here's how to operate your transaxle:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
HRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you're going less
than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you've come to a complete
stop and it's hard to shiftinto FIRST (l), put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL(N) and let up on the clutch. Press
the clutch pedal backdown. Then shift into FIRST (I).
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let upon
the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2). Then,
slowly let upon the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH(5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) AND FIFTH ( 9 , the same
way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let upon the
clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal.Just before the vehiclestops, press the
clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
NEUTRAL (N).
NEUTRAL (N): Use this position when you
start or
idle your engine.
REVERSE (R):To back up, press downthe clutch
pedal and shift into REVERSE(R). Let up on the clutch
pedal slowly while pressing theaccelerator pedal.
NOTICE:
Shift to REVERSE(R) only after your vehicleis
stopped. Shifting to REVERSE (R) while
your
vehicle is moving could damage your transaxle.
Also, use REVERSE(R), along withthe parking brake,
for parking your vehicle.
Shift Speeds
If you skip more than one gear when you
downshift, you could lose control
of your vehicle.
or others. Don’t
And you could injure yourself
shift from FIFTH(5) to SECOND (2) or
FOURTH (4) to FIRST (1).
Up-Shift Light (Manual Transaxle)
SHIFT
If you have a manual
transaxle, you have an
UP-SHIFT light. This
light will show you when
to shift to the next higher
gear for the bestfuel
economy. (In Canada, the
Up-Shift Light will not
be functional on vehicles
with the 2.2L engine.)
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions let
you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and
shift when the light comes on.
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go
on and off if you quickly change the position of the
accelerator. Ignore the UP-SHIFT light when
you downshift.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and
pull up on the parking brake lever.If the ignitionis on,
the brake system warning light will
come on.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down.
Pull the parking brake leverup until you can press the
release button. Hold the release button
in as you move
the brake lever all the way down.
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake
on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat. You may have
to
replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
The parking brake lever is located between the
bucket seats.
Shifting Into PARK (P)
( * +ovatic Tran;.-!e
Yodels Only)
r
It can be dangerous to
get out of your vehicle if
(P) with the
the shift lever is not fullyPARK
in
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have leftthe engine running, thevehicle
can move suddenly. You or otherscould be
injured. To be sure yourvehicle won’t move, even
when you’re on fairlylevel ground, use the steps
that follow. If you’re pullinga trailer, see
“Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P)position like
this: Hold in the button on
the lever, and pushthe
lever all the way toward the front of your vehicle.
3. Move the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transaxle
Models Only)
It can be dangerousto leave your vehicle with
the engine running.Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever
is not fullyin PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you
leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the
engine running unless you have to.
f you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running,
(P) and your parking
)e sure your vehicle is in PARK
brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you’ve moved
the shift lever intothe PARK (P) position, hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, seeif you can move theshift
lever away from PARK(P) without first pushing
the button.
If you can, it means that theshift lever wasn’t fully
locked into PARK (P).
2-28
Torque Lock (Automatic Transaxle)
If you are parking ona hill and you don’t shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly,the weight of the
vehicle may puttoo much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”To
prevent torquelock, set the parking brake and then shift
into PARK (P) properly before youleave the driver’s
seat. To find out how, see “ShiftingInto PARK (P)” in
the Index.
When you are ready todrive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need
to have another
vehicle push yoursa little uphill to take some ofthe
pressure from the parking pawl inthe transaxle, so
you can pull theshift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Outof PARK (P)
(Automatic Transaxle)
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
Your Chevrolet has a brake-transaxle shift interlock.
You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you
can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in the
RUN position. See “Automatic Transaxle” in the Index.
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
If you car )t shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever -- push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P)and also release the shift lever button on floor
shift console models as you maintain brake application.
Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish. (Press
the shift lever button before moving the shift lever.)
If you ever hold the brake pedal down butstill can’t
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to OFF.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
5 . Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual
Transaxle Models Only)
Before you get out of your vehicle, put your manual
transaxle in REVERSE (R) and firmly apply
the
parking brake.
If you are parking ona hill, or if your vehicle is equipped
to tow a trailer, see “Towinga Trailer” in the Index.
Parking Over Things That Burn
I- -
'Lnmings
that can burncould touch hot exhaust
parts under yourvehicle and ignite. Don't park
over papers,leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.
Engine Er9aust
Engine exhaust can
kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can't see or
smell. It can cause
unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged in acollision.
Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on the road or over road debris.
0 Repairs weren't done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaustsystem had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaustis coming into
your vehicle:
Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running Your Engine While You’re
Parked (Automatic Transaxle)
It’s better not to park withthe engine running. But if you
ever have to, hereare some things to know.
/r\ CAUTION:
Idling the engine withthe climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust
into
your vehicle (seethe earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling ina closed-in place: can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle evenif
the fanswitch isat the highest setting. One place
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust with
CO can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can bea blizzard.
(See “Blizzard” inthe Index.)
--
--
A CAUTION:
t can be dangerousto get out of your vehicleif
the shift lever is not fullyPARK
in
(P)with the
parking brakefirmly set.Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when
the engine is
running unless you have to.If you’ve leftthe
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could beinjured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re fairly
on
level ground, always set your
parking brakeand
move the shift leverto PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you are parking ona hill and if you’repulling a
trailer, also see “Towing a Trailer’’ in theIndex.
I
Windows
On a vehicle with manual windows, use
the window
crank to open andclose each window.
Power Windows (If Equipped)
The driver’s window switch hasan auto-down feature.
The driver’s window can be openedto the desired
amount by pushingthe rear of the switch to the first
detent. For the auto-down feature, push the rear of the
switch allthe way down. The window will continue
going downuntil fully opened.
To stop the window while it islowering, briefly press
the switch forward, then release.
To raise the window, press and holdthe switch forward.
Lockout Switch
In a sedan model, youalso have a lockout switch.
Press itto disable the rear passenger’s power window
switches. This will prevent rear passengers from
opening and closing the windows.
The driver can still
control all windows with the switch
in the lock position.
Press the lockout button againto enable the passenger’s
window switches.
With power windows, switches on the
center console
control each of the windows when the ignition is on. In
addition, in four-door models,each rear passenger door
has a control switch for its own window.
2-32
Horn
You can sound the horn by pressing the
center of your
steering wheel nearthe horn symbols.
Tilt Steering Wheel(If Equipped)
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The lever on the left sideof the steering column
A tilt steering wheel allows youto adjust the steering
wheel before you drive.You can also raise it to the
includes your:
highest level to give your legs more room when you exit
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
and enter the vehicle.
0 Headlamp Highbow Beam Changer
To tilt the wheel, holdthe steering wheel and pull the
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
lever. Move the steering wheelto a comfortable level,
then release the leverto lock the wheel in place.
2-33
lhrn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
To signal a lane change,
just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold
it there until you
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
complete your lane change.
The lever will return by
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you itself when you release
it.
to signal a turnor a lane change.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows don’t
To signal a turn, move the leverall the way upor down.
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically.
drivers won’t see your turn signal.
An arrow on the instrument
If a bulbis burned out, replaceit to help avoid an
panel will flash in the
accident. If the arrows don’t go on
at all when you
direction of the turn
or
signal a turn, check the
fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit
lane change.
Breakers” inthe Index) andfor burned-out bulbs.
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
To change the headlamps from low beam to high or high
beam to low, pull the turn signal lever all the way
toward you. Then release it.
When the high beamsare
on, this light on the
instrument panel also
will be on.
Flash-To-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
You control the windshield wipersby moving the stalk
with the windshield wipersymbol on it up or down.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them off.
2-35
For a single wiper cycle, press thestalk down until the
wipers start, then let go. The wipers will stop after one
stalk down longer.
cycle. For more cycles, hold the wiper
Controlled Cycle Wipers(If Equipped)
For fixed delay wipercycles, move the wiper switchto
DELAY for wiper cycles witha fixed time delay
between them.
For steady wipercycles, move the wiper stalk up to
either 1 or 2, depending on the wiper speed you want.
To turn wipersoff, move the stalk down to OFF.
Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent you
from seeing well enough to drive safely.To avoid damage,
be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before
using them. If they're frozen to the windshield, carefully
loosen or thaw them.If your blades do become damaged,
get new blades or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers.
A circuit
breaker will stop them until
the motor cools. Clear away
snow or ice to prevent an overload.
If your vehicle has variablecontrolled-cycle windshield
wipers, you can set the wiper speedfor a long or short
delay between wipes.This can be very useful inlight
rain or snow.
Move the stalk toDELAY, then rotate the band to
choose the delay you want.Rotate the band upfor
shorter delay times between wiper cycles. Rotate the
band down for longer delay times between wiper
cycles.
2-36
Windshield Washer
the window and then either stop or return
to your preset
speed. If’you had no speed selected, the wipers will stop.
IA
CAUTION:
c
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
To wash your windshield, pull the stalk with the wiper
symbol on it toward you one time. The wipers will clear
2-37
4
... -
. ..
-._.
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
When you apply your brakes,
or the clutch pedalif you
have a manual transaxle, the cruise control shuts off.
0
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed
of about
25 mph (40 kmh)or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. Thiscan really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not work
at speeds below about
25 mph (40 km/h).
Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou
can’t drivesafely at a steady speed.So,
don’t use your cruise control
on winding
roads orin heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can
cause needlesswheel
spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t
use cruise controlon slippery roads.
Setting Cruise Control
1
3 CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control switch on when
you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you don’t want You
to.
could be startled and even lose control. Keep
the cruise control switchoff until you want to use
it.
1
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Push the SET button at the end of the lever and
release it .
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
startled and even lose control. So unless you wantto go
faster, don’t hold the switchat R/A.
Resuming a Set Speed
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two waysto go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to get to a higher speed.
Push the SETbutton at the endof the lever, then
release the button and theaccelerator pedal. You’ll
now cruise at the higher speed.
I
L
Suppose you set yourcruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake or
clutch pedal. This, of
course, shuts off the cruise control. But you don’t need
to reset it. Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 h/h)
or more, you can move the cruise control switch from
ON to RIA for about a half second.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed
and stay there.
If you hold the switch atR/A longer than a half second,
the vehicle will keep going
faster until you release the
switch or applythe brake orclutch pedal. You could be
Move the cruise control switch from ON to R/A.
Hold it there untilyou get up to the speed you want,
and then release the switch.To increase your speed
in very small amounts, move the switch
to R/A for
less than a half a second and thenrelease it. Each
time you do this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
0 Push in the buttonat the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then
release it.
To slow down in very small amounts, push the
button for less than half a second. Eachtime you do
this, you’ll go about 1 mph (1.6 h/h)
slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Exterior Lamps
Use the accelerator pedalto increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well yourcruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going upsteep hills, you may have tostep on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brakeor shift to a lower gear
to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake
or clutch pedal takes youout of cruise control. Many
drivers find this too much trouble and don’t use cruise
control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are several ways to turn off the cruise control:
Step lightly on the brake pedal, or push the clutch
pedal, if you have a manual transaxle,OR
0 Move the cruise switch to OFF.
The band on the turn signaVmultifunction lever controls
your vehicle’s lamps.
Erasing Cruise Speed Memory
When you turn off thecruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memoryis erased.
2-41
Parking Lamps
PC This position will turnon the following:
0
ParkingLamps
0
SidemarkerLamps
0
Taillamps
0
Instrument Panel Lights
Headlamps
0: This position will turn on the following:
0
Headlamps
0
ParkingLamps
SidemarkerLamps
Taillamps
0
Instrument Panel Lights
Turn the band clockwise all the wayto turn the lampsoff.
Lamps On Reminder
If you open the driver’s door with the ignition off and
the lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.
Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic
Light Control
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many
different driving
conditions, but they can be
especially helpful in the
short periodsafter dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system will make your high-beam headlamps
come on at reduced brightness in daylight when:
The ignition is on with the engine running,
0 The headlamp switch is OFF,
0 The parking brake is released and
0 The transaxle is not inPARK (P) on models with an
automatic transaxle.
This indicator light on your
instrument panel comeson
when the DRLare on.
A flashing DRL telltaleindicates a possible burned out
headlamp, or that the vehicle may needservice to repair
a stuck DRL relay.
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
When the DRL are on, only your high-beam headlamps
will be on at reduced brightness. The taillamps,
sidemarker and otherlamps won’t be on. Your
instrument panel won’tbe lit up either.
When you turn on the headlamp switch, your high-beam
headlamps will go out, and your headlamps willcome
on. The other lamps thatcome on with your headlamps
will also come on.
When you turn off the headlamp switch, the regular
lamps will go off, and your high-beam headlamps will
come on at reduced brightness.
To idle your vehicle with the DRLoff, set the parking
brake. The DRL will stay off until yourelease the
parking brake.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system whenyou need it.
Use your fog lamps for better vision in foggyor
misty conditions.
The switch for your fog lamps is next to the instrument
panel intensity control.
Push the topof the switch to turn the fog lampson. Push
the bottom of the switchto turn the fog lamps off.
When using fog lamps, the parking lampsor low-beam
headlamps must beon.
Fog lamps willgo off whenever the high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high beamsgo off, the
fog lamps will comeon again.
2-43
Interior Lamps
Illuminated Entry
Instrument Panel Intensity Control
When you open either front door, or open a rear door,
the lamps inside your vehicle willgo on. These lamps
will fadeoff after about 40 seconds, or when the ignition
is turned on after all the doors have been closed.
If the ignition has beenoff for less than two minutes,
the lamps inside your vehicle will stay onfor about
15 seconds to provide an illuminatedexit when you
remove the key from the ignition.
After you exit the vehicle and allof the doors have been
closed, the lamps will stay onfor an additional four
seconds before fadingoff. These lamps will alsogo on
when you press theDOOR or UNLOCK buttonon the
optional Keyless Entry Transmitter.
You can brighten or dim the instrument panel lights by
turning thedial up or down.
Turn the dial up all the way
to turn on the interior
courtesy lamps.
Front Reading Lamps(If Equipped)
Map Lamps(If Equipped)
These lamps arelocated forward of the dome lamp.
To turn on, press the switch. Pressthe switch againto
turn off.
Battery Saver
Your Chevrolet is equipped with a battery saverfeature
designed to protect your vehicle’s battery.
When any interior lamp (trunk, reading, dome, glove
box, etc.) is left on and the ignition is turned OFF, the
battery rundownprotection system will automatically
turn the lamp off after 20 minutes. This will avoid
draining the battery.This system does not protect
against leaving on the headlamps.
These lamps are located on the rearview mirror. Turn
each one on and off by pressing its switch.
2-45
To reactivate the interior lamps, either:
The ignition must be turned on,
The activated lamp switch must be turned off, then
on, OR
Mirrors
Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror
A front door must be opened.
The battery rundown protection feature will also be
activated when any dooris left open.
If your vehicleis left with the ignitionoff for over
24 days, the battery power to the clock and audio system
will turn offto reduce the battery drain. When the
ignition is turned on again, battery power will be
resupplied. Under these conditionsit will be necessary
to reset the clock and audio system settings.
To reduce glare from lamps behind you, move the lever
toward you to the night position.
Manual Remote Control Mirror
The outside rearview mirror
should be adjustedso you
can just see the side of
your vehicle when youare
sitting in a comfortable
driving position.
Power Remote Control Mirrors
(If Equipped)
The mirror control is
located on the driver’s door.
Rotate the control clockwise
or counterclockwise to
choose the mirror you
want to adjust.
Then move the control in the direction you want the
mirror to move. Adjust each mirrorso you can just see
the side of your vehicle when you are sitting in a
To adjust your passenger’s side mirror, sit in the driver’s comfortable driving position.
seat and have a passenger adjust the mirror
for you.
The mirror is a spring-loaded breakaway design.
The mirror is a spring-loaded breakaway design.
Adjust the driver’s side outside mirror with the
control
lever on the driver’s door.
2-47
..
Convex Outside Mirror
Storage Compartments
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex.
A convex
mirror’s surface is curvedso you can seemore from the
driver’s seat.
Center Console Storage Area
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hita vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
To open the center console, pull the
lift lever up and the
lid back.
To close the center console, push the lid down until
it clicks.
Center Console Cupholders
Open the center console lid all the
way to uncover the
front and rear cupholders. There isalso a cupholder at
the front of the console.
Convenience Net (If Equipped)
like grocery bags, behind the net.
It can help keep them
from falling over during sharp turnsor quick starts and
stops. Unclip a corner of the convenience net tofit
larger objects behind the net, then re-clip
it to secure
them in place.
The net isn’t for larger, heavier loads. Store them in th
trunk as far forward as you can.
You can unhook the netso that it will lie flat when
you’re not usingit.
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. You’ll seeit
just inside the back wall of the trunk. Put small loads,
I NOTICE:
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
To use the lighter,just push it in all the way and letgo.
When it’s ready,it will pop back out by itself.
I NOTICE:
I
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand
while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to
back away from the heating element
when it’s
ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the
lighter and the heating
element.
To clean the
plate, lift the
To clean the
snuffer, and
front ashtray, push down on the snuffer
ashtray out then empty
it.
rear ashtray, open
it, push down on the
pullit out.
Don’t put papers and other things that burn into
your ashtrays. Ifyou do, cigarettes or other
smoking materials could set them on fire,
causing damage.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.
You
can also swing themto the side.
Sunroof (If Equipped)
Press andrelease the rear of
the switch and theglass
panel will open to the vent
position.
Open the sunshade by
hand when usingthe
vent position.
Convertible Top (If Equipped)
The following steps explain the properoperation of your
convertible top.
NOTICE:
0
0
Press and release the rear of the switch again to open the
glass panel and the sunshade. Press the front of the
switch to stop the panel in any position.
Press and hold thefront of the switch to close the glass
panel. The sunshade can only be closed by hand.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed if
your Chevrolet has an electrical failure.
0
Remove any itemsfrom the convertible top
storage areabefore you lower the top. Even
small items in the storage area can damage
the top or other parts
of the system.
Don’t raise or lower the convertible top
when the temperature is below 20°F
(-7°C). The cold can cause cracks and
other damage to the top asis itbeing
lowered or raised.
Don’t raise or lower the convertible top while
the vehicle is moving.The wind could
damage thetop. Bring thevehicle to a
complete stop before attempting toraise or
lower the top. Always make sure that the top
is securely latched before driving the vehicle.
2-51
Lowering Your Convertible Top
1. Set theparking brake and shift your automatic
transaxle toPARK (P) or your manual transaxle to
NEUTRAL (N).
2. Turn the ignition to the RUN position.
3. Lower the side door windows to avoid wear to the
weatherstrips.
4. Push the buttonin the latch handle and turn the
handle downto unhook the latch pins from the holes
over the windshield.
5. Pull the latch handle rearward away from the
windshield and holdit until the convertible top
is
fully lowered.
2-52
Installing the Boot
1
I
6. Rotate the latch handle up to the lockedposition.
1. From inside the vehicle, pull the tab on the rear seat
to fold down the seat.See “Fold-Down Rear Seat” in
the Index.
2. Open the trunk and remove both bootside covers.
Leave the trunk open.
3. Install the boot side cover byinserting the tab (A) on
the underside of the coverinto the slot (B) at the top
of the quarter trim panel.Place the rearflap of the
boot side cover in the
trunk lid opening, aligningthe
eyelet (C) over the boot snap ball stud (D).
2-54
4. Attach the two snaps on theinside flap of the side
cover tothe top of the quartertrim panel. Attach the
front snap (E) first and then the rear snap (F). The
rear snapis adjustable for ease of installation.
5. Pull the boot center cover from behind the rear
seatback and place it over theinner sides of the boot
side covers and the lowered top.
6. Go to the rear of the vehicle. Place the boot center
cover alongthe trunk lid opening. Align one snap on
the corner of the bootto the ball stud and push
forward. Repeat for other snap.
7. Close the trunk lid.
8. Raise the rear seatback to the up position. Push the
seat back to make sureit is latched.
2-55
nemoving the Boot
1. Set the parking brakeand shift your automatic
transaxle toPARK (P) or your manual transaxle to
NEUTRAL (N).
2. Open the trunk and leaveit open.
4. Go to the rear of the vehicle. Pull the snap knobs
rearward to disengage the rear center cover. Carefully
tuck the center boot behind the rear seatback. Make
sure that the center coveris not covering the rear
seatback latch. Tuckthe end of the center boot
rearward to keep it away from the rear seatback hinge.
I
3. From inside the vehicle, fold down the rear seatback.
See “Fold-Down Rear Seat” in the Index.
2-56
5 . Unsnap both boot side cover snaps (E and F) from
the sideof the quarter trim panel.
6. Lift the side covereyelet (C) at the rearof the side
boot cover from the snap ball stud (D). Raise the
back of the boot side coverto unhook the tab (A)
from the slot (B) in thequarter trim panel. Do the
same on theother side.
7. Store both boot side covers in thetrunk.
8. Close the trunk.
9. Raise the rear seatbackto the up position. Pushthe
seat back to makesure it is latched.
Raising the ConvertibleTop
1. Set the parking brake and shift your automatic
transaxle to PARK (P) or your manual transaxle to
NEUTRAL (N).
2. Turn the ignition to RUN.
3. Lower the door windowsto avoid wear to the
weatherstrips.
5. Push the handle forward toward the windshield and hold
it until the convertibletop is fully raised, and the latch
pins are all the way in the holes above the windshield.
6 . Turn the latch handle upto lock the top. Be sure the
top is securely latched.
4. Push the button in the latch handle and rotate
the
handle down.
Lowering the Top Manually
NOTICE:
I
Do not attempt to lower the top manually
as
damage to the vehicle will occur. If the fails
top to
raise or lower completely, see “Raising the
Top
Manually” following.
Raising the Top Manually
If your vehicle loses power, or something else happens
that prevents you from raising the topelectrically, you
may need to raise the top manually. This will allow you
to safely drive the vehicle until you can get the top
repaired. Raising the convertible top manually should
only be done in an emergency andrequires two people.
Before you do these steps, check to make surethat
the bypass switch inthe trunk is switched up to the
NORMAL OPERATIONposition. If it is not, switch it
to the NORMAL OPERATION positionand see if the
power top works.
1. Set the parking brake and shift your automatic
transaxle to PARK (p) or your manualtransaxle to
NEUTRAL (N). Turn the engine off.
2. Push the button in the latch handle and rotate the
handle down.
3. Open the trunk.
4. Press the bypass switch downto the EMERGENCY
OVERRIDE position.The switch is located under
the shelf panel on the driver’s side
in the trunk.
5. Remove the top boot as described in Steps 1 through
9 in “Removing the Boot”earlier in this section.
6 . Lower the door windows completely. If the power
windows do not work,leave the doors open.
7. Position one person on each sideof the vehicle.
Carefully lift the topby grasping the front cornersof
the top, not the linkage.
NOTICE:
Convertible Bypass Switch
2-60
Do not attemptto force the top up if it does not
move freely. The topor its linkage can be
damaged. Make sure both sides are being lifted
if you
together to avoid twisting. See your dealer
still can’t move the top easily.
'8. Raise the top until it is all the way up. Line up the
top so the pins are even with theholes.
9. Pull down on thetop and rotate the latch handle up
to lock the convertible top. Be sure the top is
latched securely.
10. Press the bypass switch up tothe NORMAL
OPERATION position.
11. Close the trunk.
2-61
The Instrument Panel-- Your Information System
h
W
W
I
I
W
Your instrument panel is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’llknow how fast
you’re going, how much fuel is leftin the tank, and many other things you’ll need to drive safely and economically.
The main components of your instrument panel are:
1. Instrument Panel Intensity Control
7. Climate Controls and Rear Window Defogger
2. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
8. Ashtray
3. Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
9. Parking Brake Lever
4. Ignition Switch
10. Tilt Steering Wheel Lever (If Equipped)
5. Windshield Wipermasher Controls
11. Hood Release Lever
6. Audio System
12. Fuse Panel
Instrument Panel Clusters
Your Chevrolet is equipped withone of these instrument panel clusters, which include indicator warning lights and
gages that are explainedon the following pages.Be sure to read about those that apply
to the instrument panel cluster
for your vehicle.
Standard Cluster
Optional Cluster
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed
in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour
(km/h). Your
odometer shows howfar your vehicle has been driven,
in either miles (usedin the United States)or kilometers
(used in Canada).
Your Chevrolet has a tamper resistant odometer.
If you
see silver lines between the numbers, you’ll know that
someone has probably tried to turn
it back, so the
numbers may not be true.
Trip Odometer (If Equipped)
RPM
APPLY BRAKE TO
SHIFT FROM PARK
You may wonder what happensif your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed.
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle
has been driven since you last reset the trip odometer
to zero.
and a label must
be put on the driver’s door to show the old
mileage reading whenthe new odometer was installed.
To set the trip odometer to zero, press the knob to the
right of it.
If the new onecan be set to the mileage total
of the old
odometer, then it must
be. But if it can’t, thenit’s set at zero
Warning lights and gagescan signal that somethingis
wrong before it becomes serious enough
to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attentionto
your warning lights and gages could
ais0 save you or
others from injury.
Tachometer (If Equipped)
1
1 The tachometer displays the
Warning lights comeon when there may beor is a
problem with one of your vehicle's functions.As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you startthe
engine just to let you knowthey're working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should
not be alarrned
when this happens.
NOTICE:
I
I
I
Gages can indicate when there may or
be isa problem
with one of your vehicle's functions. Often gages and
warning lights work togetherto let you know when
there's a -problem withyour vehicle.
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in When one of the warning lights comeson and stays on
the red area,or engine damagemay occur.
when youare driving, or when one of the gages shows
I
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
there may be a problem, check the section that tells y
what to do about it. Please follow this manual's advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages.They're a big help.
2-67
_
_
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the keyis turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come on forabout eight seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety beltis
already buckled.
I
check includesthe air bag sensor, theair bag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information onthe air bag system, see “Air
Bag” in the Index.
The safety beltlight will
also come on and stay on
for about 20 seconds, then it
will flash for about 55
seconds. If the driver’s belt
is already buckled,neither
the chime nor thelight will
come on.
AIR
BAG
This light will come on
when you start your engine,
and it willflash for a few
seconds. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.
~~~~
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readinesslight on the instrument
panel, which shows AIR BAG.The system checks the
air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system
2-68
If the air bag readiness light stays on afteryou start the
engine or comes on when you are
driving, your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
The air bag readinesslight should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the
ignition key to RUN.If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
so it will be
ready to warn you if there
is a problem.
Charging System Light
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition, and
the engine is not running, as
a check to show you it is
working. Then it should
go out when the engine
is started.
Brake System Warning Light
Your Chevrolet’s hydraulic brake systemis divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, theother part can
still work and stop you.For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away
BRAKE
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with
the electrical charging system.
It could indicate that youhave a loose generator drive
belt, or another electrical problem. Haveit checked
right away. Driving while this light is on could drain
your battery.
This light should come on
briefly when you turn the
ignition key toRUN.
If it doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn youif there’s
a problem.
If you must drive a short distance withthe light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories,such as the radio
and air conditioner.
2-69
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal maygo closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towedfor service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle’’
il he *)
Your brake system may not be working
propc--y
is on. Driving
if the brake system warning light
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident.If the lightis still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight
will also come on when you set your parking brake. The
light will stay onif your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If it stays onafter your parking brake is fully
released, it means you havea brake problem.
2-70
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when youstart your
engine and it will stay
on for three seconds.
That’s normal.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF.Or, if the
light comes on when you’redriving, stop as soon as
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the light still stays on, or
comes on again while you’redriving, your Chevrolet
needs service.If the regular brake system warninglight
isn’t on, you still have brakes, but youdon’t have
anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and
there’s a problem with your regular brakes.See “Brake
System Warning Light” earlier in this section.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should
come
on briefly whenyou turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, haveit fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if thereis a problem.
Enhanced Traction System Warning Light
(If Equipped)
ETS
OFF
With the Enhanced Traction
System (ETS), this warning
light should come on briefly
as you start the engine. If
the warning light doesn’t
come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn
you if there’s a problem.
If it stays on, or comes on when you’redriving, there
may be a problem with your Enhanced Traction
System
and your vehicle may needservice. When this warning
light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
The Enhanced TractionSystem warning light may come
on for the following reasons:
a If you turn the ‘system off
by moving the shift lever
to FIRST (1) or SECOND (2), the warning light will
come on and stay on. To turn the system back on,
move the shift lever back to a position other than
FIRST (1) or SECOND ( 2 ) .The warning light
should go off. (See “Enhanced Traction System” in
the Index for more information.)
0
The warning light will come on when youset your
parking brake with the engine running, andit will
stay on if your parking brake doesn’t
release fully. If
the transaxle shift lever is in any position other than
FIRST (1) or SECOND ( 2 ) and the warning light
stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it
means there’s a problem with the system.
0
If the traction control system is affected by an
engine-related problem, the system will turn off
and the warning light will come on.
If the Enhanced TractionSystem warning light comes
on and stays on for an extended period of time when
the transaxle shift lever is in any position other than
FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and the parking brakeis
fully released, your vehicle needs service.
2-71
Enhanced Traction System Active Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
When your Enhanced
LOW
TRAC
Traction System is limiting
wheel spin, this light will
come on. Slippery road
conditions mayexist if the
Enhanced Traction System
active light comes on, so
adjust your driving
accordingly.
The light will stay on for a few seconds after the
Enhanced Traction System stopslimiting wheel spin.
The Enhanced TractionSystem active light also comes
on briefly when you turn the ignition key
to RUN. If the
light doesn’t comeon then, have it fixed so it will be
there to tell you when the system is active.
9H
TEMP
Your vehicle is equipped with oneof these gages. With
the ignition in the RUN position, this gage shows the
engine coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves
into the redarea, your engine
is too hot! It means that your engine coolant has
overheated. If you have been operating your vehicle
under normal drivingconditions, you should pull off the
road, stop your vehicle and turn
off the engine as soon
as possible.
In “Problems on the Road,”
this manual shows whatto
do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
Low Coolant Warning Light
If this light comeson and
stays on, your system is low
on coolant and theengine
may overheat.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Check Engine Light)
Your Chevrolet is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
CHECK
See the Index under “Engine Coolant’’ and have your
vehicle serviced as soonas you can.
This system is called OBD I1 (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissionsare at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. (In Canada,OBD I1 is replaced by
Enhanced Diagnostics.) The CHECK ENGINE light
comes on to indicate that thereis a problem and service
is required, Malfunctions often will be indicated by the
system before any problemis apparent. This may
prevent more seriousdamage to your vehicle. This
system is also designed to assist your service technician
in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
2-73
If the LightIs Fla+lng
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls
may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not as
be
good and your engine may not run
as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
The following may prevent moreserious damage to
your vehicle:
Reducingvehiclespeed.
Avoidinghardaccelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauledas soon as it is possible.
If the light stopsflashing and remainson steady, see “If
This light should come on, as a checkto show you it is
the Light Is On Steady” following.
working, when the ignitionis on and the engine is not
If the light continuesto flash, when it is safe to do so,
running. If the light doesn’t comeon, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait atleast 10 seconds and restart the
of two ways:
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been
Is On Steady” following.If the light is still flashing,
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle
to your
may damage the emission control system
on your
dealer or qualified service center for service.
vehicle. Dealeror qualified service center diagnosis
and service is required.
Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detectedon your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
If the LightIs On Steady
Have you recently changed brands
of fuel?
You may be ableto correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see
“Fuel” in the Index). Poorfuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed.You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you
put the vehicleinto gear, misfiring, hesitationon
acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engineis warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the ligh
to turn on.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. The diagnostic system can determineif the fuel
cap has been left offor improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet.
The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
If you experience oneor more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use.It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuelto turn the lightoff.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off
have your dealeror qualified service center check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanicalor electrical
problems that may have developed.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
If you have a low engine oil
pressure problem, this light
will stay on after you start
your engine, or conze 012
when you are driving. This
indicates that your engineis
not receiving enough oil.
The engine could be low
on oil, or could have some
other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.
If you’re idling at a stop sign, thelight may blink on
and then off.
If you make a hard stop, the light may come onfor a
moment. This is normal.
Don’t keep drivingif the oil pressure is low. If
you do, yourengine can become so hot that it
catches fire.You or otherscould be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
The oil light could also come on
in three other situations:
0
When the ignitionis on but the engine is not running,
the light will come on as atest to show you it is
working, but the light willgo out when you turn the
ignition to START. If it doesn’tcome on with the
ignition on, you may have a problem with thefuse or
bulb. Have it fixed right away.
I NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and is not covered by
your warranty.
Passlock Warning Light
THEFT
SYSTEM
Up-Shift Light (Manual Transaxle)
This light comes on when
you need to shift to the
next higher gear.See
“Manual Transaxle” in
the Index. (In Canada, the
Up-Shift Light will notbe
functional on vehicles
with the 2.2L engine.)
This light will come
on when you turn
the key toward the
START position.
If the light flashes, the Passlock system has entered a
tamper mode. If the vehiclefails tostart, see “Passlock”
in the Index.
If the light comes on continuously while driving and
stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock
system. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock,
and you should see your dealer.
SHIFT
Check Gages Light
This light will come on
briefly when youare
starting the engine. If the
light comes on and stays
on while you are driving,
check your various gages
to see if they are in the
warning zones.
CHECK
GAGES
I
I
2-77
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these showa problem with your fuel gage:
Fuel Gage
I
E‘
When the ignition is on,
your fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have left.
At the service station, the gaspump shuts off before
the gage readsFULL (F).
0
It takes a little moreor less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage
may have
indicated the tank was half
full, but it actually tooka
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity
to fill
the tank.
The gage moves a little when you turn a corner
or
speed up.
When the indicator nearsEMPTY (E), you still have a
little fuel left, but you shouldget more soon.
The gage doesn’t go backto EMPTY (E) when you
turn off the ignition.
For your fuel tank capacity, see “Capacities and
Specifications” in the Index.
0Section 3
ComfortControlsandAudioSystems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your Chevrolet.
Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2
3-5
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-8
3-8
3-8
3- 10
Comfort Controls
Air Conditioning
Heating
Ventilation System
Defogging andDefrosting Windows
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock for Systems without
Automatic Tone Control
Setting the Clock for Systems with Automatic
Tone Control
AM-FM Stereo
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
3-13
3-17
3-21
3-23
3-23
3-24
3-25
3-25
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and
Automatic Tone Contro
AM-FM Stereo with CompactDisc Player and
Automatic ToneControl
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips AboutYour Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Fixed Mast Antenna
Comfort Controls
This section tells you how
to make your air system work
for you. The optional climate control system withair
conditioning uses ozone-friendlyR- 134a refrigerant.
With these systems, you can control the ventilation
and heating in your vehicle.
Your vehicle also has the
flow-through ventilation system described later in
this section.
Standard Climate Control System
Fan Knob
The left knob selects the force
of air you want.
Turn the knob clockwise to increase fan speed and
counterclockwise to decrease fan speed. To turn the fan
off, turnthe mode knob all the way counterclockwise.
In any othersetting, the fan will run continuously.
Temperature Knob
The center knob changes the temperatureof the air
coming through the system. Turnthis knob toward red
(clockwise) for warmer air. Turnit toward blue
(counterclockwise) for cooler air.
Mode Knob
The right knob has severalsettings to control the
direction of airflow. Foreach setting, set the temperature
to a comfortable setting.
VENT This setting brings in outsideair ana
directs it through the middle instrument paneloutlets.
2
'!!
BI-LEVEL: This setting brings in outsideair and
directs it two ways. Some air is directed through the
instrument panel outlets. Mostof the air is directed
through the floor ducts and a little to the defrost and
side
window vents.
Climate Control System withAir
Conditioning (If Equipped)
FLOOR: This setting sends most of the air through
the ducts near the floor. The rest comes out of the
defroster and side window vents.
'!!
9 DEFOG: This setting allows halfof the air to go
to thefloor ducts and half to the defroster and side
window vents.
DEFROST This setting directs most of theair
through the defroster andside window vents. Some of
the air goes to the floor ducts.
Fan Knob
The left knob selects the force of air you want.
Turn the knob clockwise to increase fan speed and
counterclockwise to decrease fan speed. To turn the fan
off, turn the mode knob all the way counterclockwise.In
any other setting,the fan will run continuously.The fan
must be onto run the air conditioning compressor.
3-3
Temperature Knob
The center knob changes the temperatureof the air
coming through the system. Turnthis knob toward red
(clockwise) for warmer air. Turnit toward blue
(counterclockwise) for cooler air.
Mode Knob
The right knob has several settings to control the
direction of airflow. For each setting, set the temperature
to a comfortable setting.
0MAX: This setting recirculates muchof the air
inside your vehicle and sends it through the instrument
panel outlets.The air conditioning compressor will run
automatically in this setting whenit is needed to help
cool the air in the vehicle.
2 VENT This setting brings in outside air and
directs it through the instrument panel.
' ! ! BI-LEVEL: This setting brings in outsideair and
directs it two ways.Some air is directed through the
instrument panel outlets. Most of the
air is directed
through the floor ducts and a littleto the defrost andside
window vents.
FLOOR: This setting sends mostof the air through
the ducts near the floor.
The rest comes outof the
defroster and side window vents.
'!!
9DEFOG: This setting allows half of the airto go
to the floor ducts and halfto the defroster and side
window vents.
DEFROST This setting direcrs mostof the air
through the defroster and side window vents.Some of
the air goes to the floor ducts. The air conditioning
compressor will run automaticallyin this setting whenit
is needed to help dry,the air in the vehicle.
Air ConditioningCompressor Button
Press the A/C button to operate the air conditioner
compressor. The indicatorlight above the button will
glow when theair conditioning compressor is running.
You don't have to press the buttonto run the compressor
in MAX or DEFROST.
Air Conditioning (If Equipped)
Heating
On very hot days, open the windows long enough
to let hot,
inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for your
vehicle to cool down, which should help fuel economy.
On cold days, use FLOOR withthe temperature knob all
the way in the red area. Thesystem will bring inoutside
air, heat it and sendit to the floor ducts.
For quick cool-down on very hotdays, use MAX with
the temperature knob all the way in the blue area. If this
setting is used for long periods of time, the air in your
vehicle may becometoo dry.
Your vehicle has heatducts that are directed toward
the rear seat. Keep the area under the front seats clear
of obstructions so the heated aircan reach the rear
seat passengers.
For normal cooling on hot days, use VENT with the
temperature knob in the blue area and the A/C button
pushed in. Thesystem will bring inoutside air and
cool it.
If your vehicle has an engine coolant heater, you canuse
it to help your system provide warm air faster when it’s
cold outside (0°F (-18°C) or lower). An engine
coolant heater warms thecoolant your engine and
heating system useto provide heat. See “Engine
Coolant Heater” in the Index.
On cool, but sunny days, the sun may warm your upper
body, but your lower body may not be warmenough.
You can use BI-LEVEL with the temperature knob in
the middle and the A/C button pushedin. The system
will bring in outside air and direct slightly warmer air to
your lower body. You may notice this temperature
difference more at some times than others.
Ventilation System
Ventilation Tips
For mild outside temperatures when little heatingor
cooling is needed, useVENT to direct outside air
through your vehicle. Your vehicle also has the
flow-through ventilation system described later in
this section.
0
Keep the hood andfront air inlet free of ice, snow or
any otherobstruction, such as leaves. The heater and
defroster will workfar better, reducing the chanceof
fogging the insideof your windows.
When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, adjust the
mode knob to FLOOR and the fan to the highest
speed for a few moments before driving off. This
helps clear the intake ductsof snow and moisture
and reduces the chance of fogging the inside
of
your windows.
Your vehicle's flow-through ventilation system supplies
outside air into the vehicle when it is moving. Outside
air will also enter the vehicle when the
air conditioning
fan is running.
0
Keep the air path under the front seats clear
of objects.
This helps air circulate throughout your vehicle.
Defogging and Defrosting Windows
Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)
Your system hastwo settings for clearing the front and
side windows. To defrost the windows quickly, use
DEFROST with the temperatureknob all the wayin the
red area. To warm passengers while keeping the
windows clean, use DEFOG.
The rear window defogger
uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the
rear window.
Press the button to turn
the defogger on.It will
turn itselfoff after about
10 minutes.
To defog the side windows, set the right control to
BI-LEVEL and thefan control to the highest setting.
To defog the side windows while using theair
conditioner, set the right controlto BI-LEVEL, the fan
control to the highest setting, and press theA/C button.
For both systems, aim theside vents toward the side
windows. For increased airflow to the side vents, close
the center vents.
If you turn it on again, the defogger will only runfor
about five minutes before turning off.You can also turn
it off by pressing the buttonagain.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license across the
defogger gridon the rear window.
I NOTICE:
Don’t use a razor blade or anything else sharp on
the insideof the rear window. If you
do, you
could cut or damage the warminggrid, and the
repairs wouldn’t be coveredby your warranty.
3-7
Audio Systems
AM-FM Stereo (If Equipped)
Your [email protected] system has been designedto operate
easily and give years of listening pleasure.You will get
the most enjoyment out of
it if you acquaint yourself
with it first. Find out what your Delco system cando
and how to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re
getting the most out of the advanced engineering that
went into it.
Setting the Clock for Systems without
Automatic Tone Control
Press SET.SET will appear on the displayfor five
seconds. Within five seconds, press and hold the right
arrow on theSEEK button until the correct minute
appears. Press and hold the left arrow on the SEEK
button until the correct hour appears.
Setting the Clockfor Systems with
Automatic Tone Control
Press and holdHR until the correct hour appears. Press
and hold MN until the correct minute appears.
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off and
controls the volume.To increase volume and turn the
radio on, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it
counterclockwise to decrease volume.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off
by
pressing theRECALL knob. When the radiois playing,
press this button to recall the station frequency.
Finding a Station
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch betweenAM
and FM. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob tochoose radio stations.
SEEK: Press the rightor left arrow togo to the next
5. Press and hold one of the four numbered buttons,
within five seconds. The sound will mute. Whenit
returns, release the button. Whenever you press tha
numbered button, the station you set will return.
higher or lower station and stay there.
SCAN: Press and holdone of the SEEK arrows, then
press the other SEEK arrow; SCAN will appear on the
display. Use SCAN to listen to stations for a few
seconds. The radio will go to a station, stopfor a few
seconds, then go on to the next station.The radio will
scan up or down the radio band, dependingon the arrow
you pressed first. Press bothSEEK arrows or the upper
knob to stop scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttonslet
you return to your favorite stations.You can set up to
14 stations (seven AM and sevenFM). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
In addition to the four stations already set, upto three
more stations may be preseton each band by pressing
two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press any two adjoining pushbuttonsat the same
time, within five seconds. The sound will mute.
When it returns, release the buttons. Whenever you
press the same buttons, the station you set will
return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pairof pushbuttons.
3-9
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide the lever up or down to increaseor
decrease bass.
TREB: Slide the lever upor down to increase or
decrease treble.If a stationis weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob
to move
the soundto the left or right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower
knob to move
the soundto the frontor rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: This knob turns the system on andoff and
controls the volume.To increase volume andturn the radio
on, turn the knob clockwise.Turn it counterclockwise to
decrease volume.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off
by
pressing the RECALL knob. When the radio is playing,
press this button to recall the station frequency.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between AM,
FM1 and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right or left arrow to go to the next
higher or lower station and stay there.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations.You can set up to
21 stations (seven A M , seven FM1, and sevenFM2 ). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
5 . Press and hold one of the four numbered buttons,
within five seconds. The sound will mute. Whenit
returns, release the button. Whenever you press that
numbered button, the station you set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
In addition to the four stations already set, up to three
more stations may be preset on each band by pressing
two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press any two adjoining pushbuttons at the same
time, within five seconds. The sound will mute.
When it returns, release the buttons. Whenever
you press the same buttons, the station you set
will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
P.SCAN: Press both SEEK arrows and P.SCAN will
appear on the display. Use P.SCANto listen to each of
your preset stations for a few seconds. The radio will go
to the first preset station stored on yourpushbuttons,
stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. (If a preset station has weak reception, it will no
stop.) Press either SEEK arrow or the upper knob to
stop scanning.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide the lever up or down to increase or
decrease bass.
TREB: Slide the lever up or down to increase or
decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move
the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
REV: Press the SEEK arrow pointing
to the left and
the tape will reverse rapidly until you press this button
again lightly.
FWD: Press the SEEK arrow pointing to the right and
the tape will rapidly advance until you press this button
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob
to move
again lightly.
the sound to the front
or rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
RECALL: Press this knobto hear the other side of a
tape that is playing.
Playing a Cassette Tape
EJECT Press this button to remove the tape.
The radio
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are will play. If you leave a cassette tape
in the player while
30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
listening to the radio,it may become warm.
that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
CLN: If this message appearson the display, the
If you hear nothingor hear just a garbled sound,it may
cassette tape player needsto be cleaned.It will still play
not be in squarely. Press
EJECT to remove the tape and
tapes, but you should cleanit as soon as possible to
start over.
prevent damageto the tapes and player.See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
While the tape is playing, use the
VOL, FADE, BAL,
the player, press and hold EJECT
for five secondsto
BASS andTREB controls just asyou do forthe radio.
reset
the
CLN
indicator.
The
radio
will display--- to
Other controls may have different functions when a tape
show the indicator was reset.
is inserted. The display will show an arrow to show
which side of the tape is playing.
3-12
~~
AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape Player
and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
audio system adjusts automaticallyto make up for road
and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level.Move the control ring behindthe upper
knob clockwise to adjust theSCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume,as necessary,
to overcome noise atany particular speed. The volume
level should always soundthe same to you as you drive.
If you don’t wantto use SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each detent on the control ring allowsfor
more volume compensation at a faster rate
of speed.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between
AM, FMI
and FM2. The display shows your selection.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn theknob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The faster the
PWR-VOL knob is rotated, the quicker the radio goes to
maximum. The knob is capable of rotating continuously.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press
this button to recall station frequency.
SCV Your system has afeature called
Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). WithSCV, your
TUNE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations.Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using
it.
SEEK: Press the right or left
arrow to go to the next highe
or lower station. The sound will mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press and holdSEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display.SCAN allows youto
listen to each station for a few seconds.The radio will
go to a station, stopfor a few seconds, thengo on to the
next station. PressSEEK again to stop scanning. The
sound willmute while scanning.
3-13
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations.You can set upto
18 stations (six AM,six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station,
4. Press AUTO TONEto select the equalization that
best suits the type of station selected.
5 . Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons.The
sound will mute. Whenit returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the AUTO TONE
equalization that you selected will also be
automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P.SCAN: Press this button to listen to each
of your
favorite stations storedon your pushbuttonsfor a few
seconds. The radio will scan through each
of the stations
stored on your pushbuttons, except those stations with
weak reception.The AUTO TONE setting stored for
that pushbutton will be automatically chosen. Press
P.SCAN or one of the pushbuttons again to stop
scanning. P.SCAN will be displayed whenever the tuner
is in theP.SCAN mode. The channel number (P1 -P6)
will appear momentarilyjust before the frequencyis
3-14
displayed. In FM mode, this function will scan through
both FMl and FM2 preset stations andFM1 or FM2 will
appear on the display.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to
decrease bass. When you use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switchto manual.
TREB: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise
to decrease treble. When you use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch
to manual. If a station
is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset
bass and treble equalization settings designed for classical,
news, rock, pop, country/western andjazz stations. C/W
will appear on the display when you first press AUTO
TONE. Each time you press it, another setting will appear
on the display. Press it again afterJAZZ appears and the
AUTO TONE display will go blank. Tone control will
return to theBASS and TREB knobs. Also, if you use the
BASS and TREB knobs, control willreturn to them and the
AUTO TONE display will go blank.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends.
Turn the knob clockwisefor the right speakers and
counterclockwise for the left speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to adjust the soundto the front speakers
and counterclockwise for the rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that
are
30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are so thin they may not work wellin this player.If
a tape is inserted whenthe ignition is on butthe radio is
off, the tape will begin playing.A tape symbol is shown
in the center ofthe graphic display whenever a tape
is
inserted. When a tape is active, thetape symbol will be
accompanied by a direction arrow.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL,AUTO TONE,
BAL, FADE, BASSand TREB controlsjust as you do
for the radio. Other controls mayhave different
functions when a tape is inserted.
The display will show
the tape symbol and an arrow to show which side of
tape is playing.
If you hear nothingor hear just a garbled sound,it may
not be in squarely.Press EJECT to remove the tape and
start over.
The player is able to detect a tightor broken tape, and
will eject the tape. The radio will go back to playing the
last station selected.
The player automatically senses the cartridge
for metal
or CrO2 and setsthe pre-emphasis. Anytime a tape is
inserted, the top sideis selected to play first.
PREV (1): Press this buttonor the SEEK left arrow to
search for the previous selection
on the tape. Your tape
must have at least three seconds
of silence betweeneach
selection for PREV or SEEK to work. The tape direction
arrow blinks during PREVor SEEK operation. The
sound will mute during PREV
or SEEK operation. Press
this button orone of the SEEK arrows again to return to
normal play.
PROG (2): Press this buttonto play the other sideof
the tape.
NEXT (3): Press this buttonor the SEEK right arrow to
search for the next selection on the tape. If you hold the
button or press it more thanonce, the player will
continue moving forward through the tape.
Your tape
must haveat least three secondsof silence between each
selection for NEXT orSEEK to work. The tape
direction arrow blinksduring NEXT or SEEK operation.
The sound will mute during NEXT
or SEEK operation.
Press this buttonor one of the SEEK arrows again to
return to normal play.
REV (4): Press this buttonto reverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to returnto playing speed. Theradio will
play thelast-selected station while thetape reverses.
00 (5): Press this buttonto reduce background
noise. Note that the double-D symbol will appear
on
the display.
[email protected] Reduction is manufactured under
a
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
FWD (6): Press this button to advance quicklyto
another partof the tape. Pressthe button againto return
to playingspeed. The radio will playthe last-selected
station while the tape advances.
AM-FM: Press this button to playthe radio when a tape
is in the player.
TAPE AUX: Press this button to change to the
tape
function when the radio is on. The tape symbol with an
arrow will appear on the display when the tape is active.
If your system is equipped with
a remote playback
device, pressing this buttona second time will allow the
remote device to play.
EJECT Press this button to remove the tape.
The radio
will play. EJECT may be activated with
either the
ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded with
the
radio off if this button is pressedfirst. If you leave a
cassette tape in the player whilelistening to the radio, it
may become warm.
CLN: If this message appears onthe display, the
cassette tape player needsto be cleaned.It will still play
tapes, but you should clean itas soon as possibleto
prevent damageto the tapes and player. See “Care
of
Your Cassette Tape Player” inthe Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold
EJECT for five seconds to
reset the CLN indicator.The radio will display --- to
show the indicator wasreset.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette
tape player after activating the bypassfeature on your
tape player.
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
To activate the bypass feature, theignition must be on.
Turn your radio off. Press TAPE AUX and holdfor
three seconds. Afterthree seconds, the tape symbol
on the display will flash fortwo seconds indicating
the feature is active. Turn the radio on andinsert
the adapter.
This override feature will remain active until EJECT
is pressed.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn theknob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob is
capable of rotating continuously.
RECALL: Press this button to recall the station being
played. If you press the button when the ignition is off,
the clock will showfor a few seconds.
SCV: Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). WithSCV, your
audio system adjusts automaticallyto make upfor road
and wind noise as you drive.Set the volume at the
desired level. Move the control ring behind the upper
knob clockwiseto adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume
level should always sound the same
to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use
SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each detent onthe control ring allows for
more volume compensation at a faster rate of speed.
Finding a StYion
AM-FM: Press this buttonto switch between AM,FMl
and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turnit to
choose radio stations. Push theknob back into its stored
position when you’re not using
it.
SEEK: Press the rightor left arrow to go to the next
higher or lower station and stay there.
The sound will
mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press oneof the SEEK arrowsfor two seconds,
and SCAN will appear on the display. Use
SCAN to
listen to stationsfor a few seconds.The radio will go to
a station, stop for a few seconds, then
go on to the next
station. Press SEEK again to stop scanning. The sound
will mute while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations.You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTOTONE to select the equalization that
best suits the type of station selected.
5. Press and holdone of the six numbered buttons.The
sound will mute. Whenit returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the AUTO TONE
equalization that you selected will also be
automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the stepsfor each pushbutton.
P.SCAN: Press this button to listen to each of your
favorite stations stored on yourpushbuttons for a few
seconds. The radio will scan through each of the stations
stored on your pushbuttons, except those stations with
weak reception. The AUTO TONE setting stored for
that pushbutton will be automatically chosen. Press
P.SCAN or one of the pushbuttons again to stop
scanning. P.SCAN will be displayed whenever thetuner
is in the P.SCAN mode. The channel number (Pl-P6)
will appear momentarily just before the fi-equency
is displayed.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to
decrease bass. When you use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual.
TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise
to decrease treble. When youuse this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual. If a station
is weak or noisy, you may want
to decrease the treble.
Push these knobsback into their stored positions when
you’re not usingthem.
AUTO TONE: This feature allows you tochoose preset
bass andtreble equalization settings designed for
classical, news, rock, pop, country/western andjazz
stations. C/W will appear on the display when youfirst
press AUTO TONE. Each time you press it, another
setting will appear on the display. Press it again after
JAZZ appears and theAUTO TONE display will go
blank. Tone control will return to the BASS and TREB
knobs. Also, if you use the BASS and TREBknobs,
control will return to them and theAUTO TONE
display will go blank.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends.
Turn the knob clockwise for the right speakers and
counterclockwise for the left speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the
speakers.
FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to adjust the soundto the front speakers
and counterclockwise for the rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound betweenthe speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
3-19
Playing a Comuact Disc
Insert a disc parrway into the slot, label side up, The
player will pull it in.
The disc should begin playing.The
display will showCD and the CD symbol.
If you’re driving on a very rough road
or if it’s very hot,
the disc may not play and ERR (error) may appear
on
the display. Press RECALL totake ERR off the display.
When things get backto normal, the disc should play.If
the disc comes out, it could be that:
more than once, the player will continue moving
forward through the disc.The sound willmute
while seeking.
REV (4): Press and hold this button
to quickly reverse
within a track. Releaseit to play the passage.You can
use the counter reading on the display to locate a
passage more easily.
FWD (6): Press and hold this buttonto advance quickly
within a track. Release it to resume playing.
You can
use the counter reading on the display
to locate a
The disc is upside down.
passage easily.
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
RECALL: Press this button tosee which track is
0 It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
playing. Press it again withinfive seconds to see how
try again.)
long it has been playing (elapsed time). The track
number
also appears when you change the volume
or
PREV (1): Press this buttonor the left SEEK arrow
when a new track startsto play.
to the start of a current track.If you hold the button
or press it more than once, the player will continue
AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a disc
moving back through the disc.
The sound will mute
is in the player. The lettersCD will go off the display.
while seeking.
CD AUX: Press this button to changeto the disc
RDM (2): Press this button to hear the tracks in random, function when the radiois on. A CD icon will appear on
rather than sequential, order.RANDOM will show on
the display when thedisc is in the player, whetherit is
the display. Press RDM again to turn off random play.
active or not.
RDM is reset to off when the discis ejected.
EJECT Press this button to remove the disc.
The radio
NEXT (3): Press this buttonor the right SEEK arrowto
will play. The disc will start at the first track when you
go to the next track.If you hold the buttonor press it
reinsert it.
3-20
NOTE: If you allow morethan 15 seconds to elapse
If you turn off the ignition or radio with
a disc in the
between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to
player, it will stay in the player. Whenyou turn on the
ignition or system, the disc will start playing where it was time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4.
stopped. If you press EJECT but don't remove the disc,
1. Write down any three or four-digit number from
the player will pull the disc back
in to protect it after
000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from
about one minute.If you leave a compact disc in the
the vehicle.
player while listeningto the radio, it may become warm.
2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
3. Turn the radio off.
THEFTLOCK" is designed to discourage theft of your
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
until --- shows on the display, Next you will use the
functions whenever battery poweris removed.
secret code number which you have written down.
The THEFTLOCK feature forthe radio may be usedor
5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is
with your code.
activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.
7. Press HR to make thefirst one or two digits agree
When THEFTLOCKis activated, the radio will display
with your code.
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery
power is removed. If your battery loses power for any
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the code
reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret code
matches the secret code you have written down. The
before it will operate.
display will show REP to let you know that you ne
repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your secret code.
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show
The instructions which follow, explain how to enter your
SEC to let you knowthat your radio is secure. The
secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is
indicator by the volume control will beginflashing
recommended that you read through all nine steps
when the ignition is turned off.
before starting the procedure.
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature Aftera
Power Loss
Enter your secret code asfollows; pause no more than
15 seconds betweensteps:
1. LOC appears when the ignition is on.
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
3. Press MN again to make the last twodigits agree
with your code.
4. Press HR to make the first oneor two digits agree
with your code.
5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secretcode you have written down.
The display will showSEC, indicating the radiois
now operable and secure.
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will
appear on the display.You will have to wait an hour
with the ignition on before you can try
again. When you
try again, you will only have threechances to enter the
correct code before INOPappears.
If you lose or forget yourcode, contact your dealer.
Disabling the Theft-DeterrentFeature
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
3-22
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until SEC shows onthe display.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MN again to make thelast two digits agree
with your code.
6 . Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secretcode you have written down.
The display will show---,indicating that the radiois
no longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
When battery poweris removed and later appliedto a
secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and
LOC will
appear on the display.
To unlock a secured radio,see “Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature Aftera Power Loss” earlier in
this section.
Understanding Radio Reception
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound. ButFM signals
will reach only about10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to come and go.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night.The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from thingslike storms and power lines. Try
reducing the trebleto reduce this noiseif you ever get it.
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noiseis almost undetectable
until it is too late.Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be
loud and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions
by
adjusting the volume controlon your radio toa safe
sound level before your hearing adapts
to it.
To help avoid hearing lossor damage:
0
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio be sure you can add
what you want. If you can, it’s very important to
do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operation
of your vehicle’s
engine, Delco radio or othersystems, and even
damage them.Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment
that has been added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules
covering mobileradio andtelephone units.
--
--
3-23
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player thatis not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined
cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes shouldbe stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may notoperate
properly or may causefailure of the tape player.
appear as a broken tape.If the cleaning cassette is
ejected immediatelyfrom the tape player, you will need
to override the cut tape feature.
To temporarily override this feature for vehicles with
Automatic Tone Control(for one insertion), follow
these steps:
Turn the ignition on.
Your tape player shouldbe cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate
that you haveused your tape player for 50 hours without
resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appearson
the display, yourcassette tape player needs tobe
cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should cleanit as
soon as possible to prevent damageto your tapes and
player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality,try a
known good cassette to see if it is thetape or the tape
player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement
in sound quality, clean the tape player.
When the cleaning cassette has beenejected, the broken
tape detectionfeature is active again.
Cleaning may be done with a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads whichscrub
the tape head asthe hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
A scrubbing actioncleaning cassette is available through
your Chevrolet dealership. When using
a cleaning
cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject while
cleaning because your unit
is equipped with a cut tape
detection feature and some cleaning cassettes may
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT
for
five seconds to resetthe CLN indicator. The radio will
display --- to show theindicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure
the cassette
tape is in goodcondition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Turn the radio off.
Press and hold TAPE AUX until the tape symbol
flashes on the display. (For vehicles without
Automatic Tone Control, press both SEEK arrows.)
Insert the cleaning cassette. (Insert the cassette at
least three timesto ensure thorough cleaning.)
Eject the cleaning cassette.
Care of Your Compact Discs
Fixed Mast Antenna
Handle discs carefully.Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and awayfrom direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of disc
a is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
The fixed mast antennacan withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should
ever become
slightly bent, youcan straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should
replace it.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling Check every oncein a while to be sure the mastis still
tightened to the fender.
discs. Pick up discs by grasping theouter edges or the
edge of the hole and theouter edge.
fi
NOTES
0Section 4
Your Driving and the Road
m
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2
4-2
4-6
4-6
4-10
4-12
4-13
4- 14
4- 16
4-18
4-2 1
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
City Driving
4-22
4-23
4-24
4-24
4-26
4-3 1
4-33
4-36
4-43
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer (Models with 2.4L Engine
and 4-Speed Automatic Transaxle)
Towing A Trailer (Except Models
with 2.4L Engine and 4-Speed
Automatic Transaxle)
Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable
of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving.You never
know when the vehiclein front of you is goingto brake
or turn suddenly.
Drunken Driving
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone cangive about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
Chevrolet: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)
Defensive driving really means“be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
4-2
.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving
1s
a national tragedy.It’s the numberone contributor to
the highway deathtoll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needsto drive
a vehicle:
Judgment
0
MuscularCoordination
Vision
0
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, some 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s
against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem
is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But
what if people do? How much is“too much” if the
driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
0
The amount of alcohol consumed
0
The drinker’s body weight
0
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
0
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume thealcohol.
According to the American MedicalAssociation, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up witha
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the
same BAC bydrinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1- 1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
4-3
~-
Since alcohol is carried in body water,
this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same
number ofdrinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC
U.S. states, and
of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of
throughout Canada, the limitis 0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower.
The BAC limitfor all
commercial drivers in the United
States is 0.04 percent.
It’s the amountof alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,the person’s
BAC would be closeto 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes foodjust before or during drinking will havea
somewhat lower BAClevel.
There is a gender difference,too. Women generally have
a lowerrelative percentage of body water than men.
The BAC will be over0.10 percent after threeto
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol
is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well belowa BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many peopleare impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that theeffects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being
in a collision
increases sharplyfor drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. Adriver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance
of having a
collision. At a BAC level of0.10 percent, the chance of
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chanceis 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hourto rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency,a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not beable
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s systemcan make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
Drinking and then driving
is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can havea serious or even
fatal collision if you drive after drinking.
a driver
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with
a cab; or if
who hasbeen drinking. Ride home in
you’re with a group, designate a driver whowill
not drink.
--
0-
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems thatmake your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They arethe brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking actioninvolves perception time ana
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push onthe brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then youhave to bring upyour
foot anddo it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 314 of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds
or more with
another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could bea lot of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement
or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet,d r y , icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight ofthe
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you’redriving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask moreof those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means
you can lose control
of your vehicle.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking.Some people drive in
spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster
if you
do a lot of heavy braking. If you
keep pace with the
traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will
eliminate a lotof unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down.If your engine
stops, you will stillhave some power brake assist.But
you will useit when you brake.Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harderto push.
Anti-Lock Brakes
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes(ABS). ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start yourengine, or when you beginto drive
away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself.You
may hear a momentary motor
or clicking noise while
this test is goingon, and you may even notice that your
brake pedal movesa little. This is normal.
If there’s a problem with the
anti-lock brake system, this
warning light will stay on.
See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light’’ in
the Index.
I
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster thananydrivercould.Thecomputeris
programmed to make the mostof available tire and
road conditions.
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal
jumps out in
front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with
ABS.
A computer senses that wheelsare slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stoprolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at eachfront wheel and atthe
rear wheels.
4-8
You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t changethe time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease
stopping distance. If you gettoo close to the vehicle in
front of you, you won’thave time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slowsor stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
LOW
TRAC
This light will comeon
when your Enhanced
Traction System is limiting
wheel spin. See “Enhanced
Traction System Active
Light” in the Index.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
and let anti-lock work for you.
You may feel the system
working, or you may notice some noise, butthis is normal.
Enhanced Traction System(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has theoptional four-speed automatic
transaxle, it also has an Enhanced Traction System
(ETS) that limits wheel spin.This is especially useful
in slippery road conditions.The system operates only
when the transaxle shift leveris in the REVERSE (R),
THIRD (3) or OVERDRIVE (a)
position and the
system senses thatone or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system reduces engine power and may also
upshift the transaxleto limit wheel spin.
You may feel or hearthe system working, but this
is normal.
ETS
OFF
When the transaxle shift
lever is in any position
other than FIRST (1) or
SECOND ( 2 ) and the
parking brake is fully
released, this warning light
will come on to let you
know if there’s a problem
with the system.
See “Enhanced Traction System Warning Light” in the
Index. When this warning lightis on, the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The Enhanced Traction System can operate when
the transaxle shift leveris in any position other than
FIRST (1) or SECOND (2). To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should use
the other shift lever positions only when necessary.
See
“Automatic Transaxle” in the Index.
(If your vehicle
ever gets stuck in sand,mud, ice or snow, see “Rocking
Your Vehicle” in the Index.)
When you move the shift lever
to FIRST (1) or
SECOND (2),the system will turnoff. The Enhanced
Traction System warning light will
come on and stay on.
If the Enhanced TractionSystem is limiting wheel spin
when you move the shift lever
to another position, the
system won’t turnoff right away. It will wait until
there’s no longera current need to limit wheel spin.
You can turn the system back on at any time
by moving
the shift lever to any position other than FIRST
(1) or
SECOND (2). The Enhanced Traction System warning
light should go off.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brakeat the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you
can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving onCurves
It’s importantto take curvesat a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on
the news happenon curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driveror beginner, each ofus is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it
possible for the vehicleto change its path when you turn
the front wheels.If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle
on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
The traction you can get ina curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re
in a curve, speed is the one factor
you can control.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into thestraightaway.
Suppose you’re steering througha sharp curve. Then you
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and
acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires
meet the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can
demand too much of those places.You can lose control.
Refer to “Enhanced Traction System” in the Index.
Steering in Emergencies
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the
accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it
to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while yourfront
wheels are straight ahead.
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s thetime for evasive action -- steering around
the problem.
Your Chevrolet can perform very wellin emergencies
like these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to
remove as much speed as you
can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
4-11
~.
~
Off-Road Recovery
You may find sometime that your right wheels have
dropped off the edgeof a road onto the shoulder while
you're driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision.If you are holding the steering wheelat
the recommended9 and 3 o'clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act
fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you
have
avoided the object.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery shouldbe fairly easy. Easeoff the
The fact that such emergency situations are always
accelerator and then,if there is nothingin the way, steer so
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at
that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You
all times and wear safety belts properly.
can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarterturn until the
right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then
turn your
steering wheelto go straight down the roadway.
4-12
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waitsfor just theright moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passingdriver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to
crossroads for situations that might affect your passing
patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about
making a successful pass, wait fora better time.
Watch for traflic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicatea
turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken
center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross
a solid
line on your side of the lane ora double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass
while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,
following too closely reduces your area of vision,
especially if you’re following a larger vehicle.
Also, you won’thave adequate space if the vehicle
ahead suddenly slowsor stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay inthe right lane and don’t
get too close. Time your moveso you will be
increasing speed asthe time comes to moveinto the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes upfor the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause youto cancel your pass,
you need only slow down anddrop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. Buttake care that someoneisn’t trying to
pass you as youpull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
0
Check your mirrors, glanceover your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving
out
of the right laneto pass. When youare far enough
ahead of the passed vehicleto see its front in your
inside mirror, activateyour right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirroris convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seemto be farther away from you
than it really is.)
Try not to pass more thanone vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps
are not flashing,it may
be slowing down or starting
to turn.
If you’re being passed, makeit easy for the
following driverto get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a littleto the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the
tires meet the road to
do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and
constantly seek an escape route
or area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are
always possible.
The three typesof skids correspondto your Chevrolet’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,
too
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skidis best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If you have the Enhanced Traction
System, remember:
It helps avoid only the acceleration skid.
If you do not have the Enhanced TractionSystem, or if
the transaxle shift leveris not in the OVERDRIVE(@)
position, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,try
your best to avoid sudden steering, accelerationor
braking (including engine braking by shifting
to a lower
gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tiresto slide.
You may not realize the surfaceis slippery until your
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues -- such as enough water,ice or packed snowon
the road to make a “mirrored surface”
-- and slow
down when you have any doubt.
If your vehicle starts to slide,ease your foot off the
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system(ABS) helps
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the avoid only the braking skid.
vehicle to go.If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a
second skidif it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road.For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Driving at Night
Here are sometips on night driving.
Drivedefensively.
0
Don’t drink and drive.
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
.
I
..................
.....
........”
...........
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow
down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
A
4
“A
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your
headlamps canlight up only so much road ahead.
0
Night drivingis more dangerous than daydriving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
4-15
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night Vision
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require atleast twice as much light to seethe
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you
are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who
doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield andall the glass on yourvehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build upa film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when youare in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it’seasier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as yourheadlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes
be examined regularly.Some drivers suffer fromnight
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and
aren’t even aware of it.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can't stop, accelerateor turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn't as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don't have much tread left, you'I1 get
even less traction. It's always wise
to go slower andbe
cautious if rain starts tofall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes
are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder
it is to see. Evenif your
windshield wiper bladesare in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It's wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking
or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
A CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work 1
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side.You could lose controlof the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water o
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly unt
your brakes work normally.
~
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect yourbrakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Deep Standing ’ ater
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much watercan build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
NOTICE:
This can happen if the roadis wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle
is hydroplaning,
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles
it has littleor no contact with the road.
or standing water, water can come in through
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But
it can if your
your engine’s air intake and badly damage your
tires do not have much treador if the pressure inone or
engine. Never drive through water that is slightly
more is low.It can happenif a lot of water is standing on
of your vehicle.If you
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone lower than the underbody
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing
water, drive
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
through them very slowly.
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happensat higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The
best advice is to slow down whenit is raining.
Some Other Rainy WeatherTips
Turn on your low-beam headlamps-- not just
your parking lamps-- to help make you more
visible to others.
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
0
Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See
“Tires” in the Index.)
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:
0
Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an
unknown part of the city just as you wouldfor a
cross-country trip.
0
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the
next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
0
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll wantto watch outfor
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light
is there because the comer isbusy enoughto need it.
When a light turns green, and just before you start to
move, check both waysfor vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be runningthe
red light.
Freeway Driving
The most important adviceon freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keepto the right. Drive at the same
speed mostof the other driversare driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway aaspassing lane.
At the entrance, thereis usually a ramp that leads
to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge
into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switchon your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed
to the
posted limitor to the prevailing rateif it’s slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then
use
your turn signal.
for
freeways
thnxways7parkways7
Just
before
you
leave
the
lane,
glance
quickly
over
your
expressways7
Or
are the safest
shoulder
make
tosure
there
isn’t
another
vehicle
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
“blind” spot.
4-22
in your
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
When you want toleave the freeway, moveto the proper
lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not,
under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to
the next exit.
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
Chevrolet dealerships all across North America. They’ll
be ready and willing to help if you needit.
Here are some things you can check before
a trip:
0
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
The exitramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
0
Wiper Blades:Are they in goodshape?
The exit speed is usually posted.
0
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids:Have you checked
all levels?
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tendto think you are going
slower than you actually are.
Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
0
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
0
Weather-Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay yourtrip a short
time to avoid a major storm system?
0
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Before Leaving ona Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you
can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s readyto go. If it needs
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually sucha condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it justplain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lackof awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch
of road with
the same scenery, along with
the hum of the tires on the
road, the droneof the engine, and the rush
of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’titlet
happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the
road in less than a second,and vou could crash and
be injured.
What can youdo about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead andto
the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service
or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise,
or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as
an emergencv.
Driving on steep hills or mountainsis different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
0
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL(N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous.Your brakes will have to
do all the workof slowing down. Theycould get
so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would
then have poor brakingor even none going down
a hill. You could crash.Always have your engine
running and yourvehicle ingear when you
go downhill.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
0
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that theywouldn’t work well. You would
then have poor brakingor even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Shift downto let
your engine assist your brakes on
a steep
downhill slope.
0
0
0
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transaxle, and you can climb the
hill better.
Stay in your ownlane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wideor cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your ownlane.
As you go over thetop of a hill, be alert. There could b
something in your lane, likea stalled car or an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of
special problems. Examples are long grades, passing o
no-passing zones, a falling rocks areaor winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Here are Some tips for winter driving:
Havk y6i-n Chevrolet in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency suppliesin
your trunk.
4-26
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a redcloth and a
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will
be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag
of sand, a pieceof old carpetor a couple of burlap bags
to help provide traction.Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and the
road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll havea
lot less tractionor “grip” and willneed to be very careful.
What’s the worsttime for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even moretrouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32”F; OOC) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
If you have the Enhanced Traction System, keep the
transaxle shift lever in theOVERDRIVE (0)
position so
the system will be able to operate. It will improve your
ability to accelerate when driving ona slippery road. Even
though your vehicle has this system, you’ll want to slow
down and adjust your driving to the road conditions. See
“Enhanced Traction System” in the Index.
If you don’t have the Enhanced Traction System,
accelerate gently. Try not to break
the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
4-27
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you makea hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you havethe anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stoppingsooner than you wouldon dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock‘’ in the Index.
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On
an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behindbuildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may
remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If
you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake beforeyou
are on it. Try not to brake whileyou’re actually on
the ice, and avoidsudden steering maneuvers.
f
If you are stopped by heavy snow, youcould be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay withyour
vehicle unless you knowfor sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and
your passengers safe:
0
Turn on your hazard flashers.
0
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped bythe snow.
0
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.
4-2
A CAUTIl- N:
Snow can trap exhaustgases under yourvehicle.
CO (carbon monoxide) gas
This can cause deadly
to get inside. CO could overcomeyou and kill
you. You can’t seeit orsmell it, so you might not
know it is in your
vehicle. Clear awaysnow from
around thebase of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to timebetosure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the sideof the
vehicle that’s away from thewind. This will help
keep CO out.
Run your engine only as longas you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. Thatis, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the
battery charged.You will need a well-charged batteryto
restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on
with your headlamps. Letthe heater run for awhile.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeatthis only when youfeel really uncomfortable
from the cold. Butdo it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half houror so until help comes.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Follow these steps:
You can tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for use
at your destination. Be sure to use the proper towing
equipment designed for recreational towing. Followthe
instructions for the towing equipment.
1. Put the front wheelson a dolly.
Towing Your Vehicle from the Front
(With a Dolly)
m
l
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Open the fuse Dane1 on the driver’s side of the
instrument panel. Remove thefuse labeled
CLS/PCM. This will keep your battery from draining
while towing.
4. Turn the ignition keyto OW to unlock the steering
wheel, see “Ignition Positions” in the Index.
5 . Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead positio
with a clamping device designed
for towing.
I
I
6. Release the parking brake.
When you are finished towing, makesure you replace
the CLS/PCMfuse in the instrument panelfuse block.
Towing Your Vehicle From the Front
(Without a Dolly)
You may tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground for unlimited milesif you havea four-speed
automatic or a five-speed manual transaxle. Follow
these steps:
L
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Open the fuse panelon the driver’s side of the
instrument panel. Remove thefuse labeled
CLSPCM. This will keep your battery from draining
while towing.
3. Turn the ignition keyto OFF to unlock the
steering wheel.
4. Shift your transaxleto NEUTRAL (N).
5. Release the parking brake.
When you are finished towing, make sure you replace
the CLSRCM fuse in the instrument panel
fuse block.
NOTICE:
Make sure that the towing speed does not
exceed 65 mph (108 kmh), or your vehicle
a
could be badly damaged. For vehicles with
three-speed transmission, make sure that the
towing speed does not exceed
35 mph (58 km/h)
and that the distance traveled does not exceed
50 miles (83 km).
Towing Your Vehicle from the Rear
I -
I
8
NOTICE:
Do not tow your vehicle from the
rear. Your
vehicle could be badly damaged and the repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Loading Your Vehicle
‘m
TIRE-LOADING INFORMATION
OCCUPANTS
VEHICLE CAP. WT.
CTR.
FRT.
RR.
TOTAL LBS.
KG
MAX. LOADING & GVWR SAME AS VEHICLE
CAPACITY WEIGHT
XXX
COLD TIRE
TIRE SIZE
PRESSURE
SPEED
RTG
PSI/KPa
FRT.
RR.
SPA.
IF TIRES ARE HOT, ADD 4PS1/28KPa
SEE OWNER‘S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Two labels on yourvehicle show how much weightit
may properly carry.The Tire-Loading Information label
found on the rear edge of the driver’s door tells you the
proper size, speed rating and recommendedinflation
pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It also gives you
important information about the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and the total weight that you can
carry. This weight is called the Vehicle Capacity Weight,
and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo and all
nonfactory-installed options.
4-33
.
~
r
MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP
DATE GVWR GAWR FRT GAWR RR
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE U.S. FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE
SAFETY, BUMPER, AND THEFT PREVENTION
STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF
MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.
I A CAU’110.k
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, partson your vehicle can
break, or it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you
to lose control,
Also, overloading can shorten the life
of
your vehicle.
~
The other label is the Certification label, found on the
rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle, called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating).The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
Never exceedthe GVWR for your vehicle, or the
Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for either the front
or rearaxle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out. Don’tcarry more than 132 lbs. (60 kg) in
your trunk.
~~
If you put things inside your vehicle-- like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else -- they will goas fast
as the vehicle goes.If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
/!\ CAUTION:
CAUTION: (Continued)
e Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
Things you put inside your vehiclecan strike
and injure peoplein a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash.
Put things in the trunk or rear area
of your
vehicle. In a trunk, put themas far forward
as you can. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
If you have fold-downrear seats, you’ll
find four anchors on the back
wall of your
trunk. You can use theseanchors totie
down lighter loads. They’re not strong
enough for heavy things, however, so put
them as far forward asyou can in the trunk
or rear area.
CAUTION: (Continued)
inside the vehicle so that someof them are
above the topsof the seats.
a Don’t leave an unsecured child restraintin
your vehicle.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it wheneveryou can.
Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you
need to.
Towing a Trailer (Models with
2.4L Engine and 4-Speed
Automatic Transaxle)
NOTICE:
I
A CAUTION:
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control whenyou pull a
trailer. For example, if the traileris tooheavy, the
brakes may not work well or even at all. You
and your passengers could
be seriously injured.
Pull a trailer only if you havefollowed all the
steps inthis section. Ask your Chevrolet dealer
for advice and information about
towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
--
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your
vehicle and resultin costlyrepairs notcovered by
your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and
see your Chevrolet
a
dealer for important information about towing
trailer with your vehicle.
Do not tow a trailer if your vehicleis equipped with a
2.2L (Code 4) engine. You also cannot tow a trailer if
your vehicleis equipped with a manual or a three-speed
automatic transaxle, or is a convertible model.
Your vehicle can towa trailerif it is equipped with
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what the
vehicle trailering capacity is foryour vehicle, you
should readthe information in “Weight of the Trailer”
that appears later in this section. But trailering is
different than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, durability and
fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct
equipment, and it has to be used properly.
If You Do DecideTo Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
0
Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engineis
required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under
greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more, the
trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing
the pulling requirements.
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where youlive but
also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
information can be state or provincial police.
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km)your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km)that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
0
Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers (or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h)) to
save wear on your vehicle’sparts.
Do not tow when the ambient temperature is above
100°F (38°C).
0
Do not tow more than 1,OOO miles (1 600 km) per year.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
the weight of the trailer,
the weight of the trailer tongue
and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
Your vehicle can tow normally up to
1,000 lbs. (450 kg).
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicleis used to pulla
trailer are all important. And,it can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A)of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because itaffects the total capacity
weight of your vehicle.The capacity weight includesthe
curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in
it, and the people who will beriding in the vehicle.And
if you will towa trailer, you mustsubtract the tongue
load from your vehicle’s capacity weight because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See“Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Indexfor more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer CommunicationCentre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, OntarioLlH 8P7
L3
B
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B). If you have a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue(A) should weigh 12 percent
of the total loaded trailer weight(B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately,to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may beable to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here
are
some rules tofollow:
0
The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitchesor other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
0
Will you have to make any holes inthe body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you
do,
then be sureto seal the holes later when you remove
the hitch. If you don’tseal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaustcan get into your
vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index). Dirt
and water can, too.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information Label at the rear edgeof the
driver’s door, or see “Loading
Your Vehicle’’ in the Index.
Then be sure you don’t go over the
GVW limit for your
vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Safety Chains
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicleis by itself.
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongueBefore you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
of the trailerso that the tongue will notdrop to the road
lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
manufacturer’s recommendationfor attaching safety
electrical connection at the same time.
chains anddo not attachthem to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slackso you can turn with your rig.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that
the
And, never allow safety chains drag
to on the ground.
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Trailer Brakes
Does your trailer haveits own brakes?Be sure to read
and follow the instructionsfor the trailer brakesso
you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain them
properly. Because you have anti-lock brakes,do not try
to tapinto your vehicle’s brake system. If youdo, both
brake systems won’t work well,
or at all.
Driving with a Trailer
Following Distance
Stay at least twice asfar behind the vehicle ahead as you
would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good
deal
Before settingout for the open road, you’ll want to get longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
handling and braking with the added weight
of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
Backing Up
Turn Signals When Towinga Trailer
Hold the bottomof the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
The green arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly
hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling othe
drivers you’re aboutto turn, change lanesor stop.
Making Turns
1 NOTICE:
When towing a trailer, the green arrows
on your
instrument panel will flashfor turns even if the bulbs on
the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signal when they are not.
It’s importantto check occasionally to be sure the traile
bulbs are still working.
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailerto come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’returning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strikesoft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal wellin advance.
4-41
Driving On Grades
NOTICE:
Do not tow on steep, continuous grades exceeding
6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher than normal
engine and transaxle temperatures may result
and damage your vehicle. Frequent stops are
very important to allow the engine and transaxle
to cool.
Reduce speed and shiftto a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might haveto use your brakesso much that
they would get hot andno longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift
down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.
Pay particular attentionto the engine coolant gage.If the
indicator is in the redarea, turn off theair conditioning
(if you havethis option) to reduce engine load(see
“Engine Overheating” inthe Index).
Parking on Hills
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer
attached, on a hill. If somethinggoes wrong, your rig
could start to move. Peoplecan be injured, and both
your vehicleand the trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on ahill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift
into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocksare in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking
brake, and then shiftto PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
0
Start your engine;
0
Shift into a gear; and
Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will needservice more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, belt, cooling system and brakeadjustment.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index
will help youfind them quickly.If you’re trailering, it’s
a good idea to review these sections before you start
your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts
are tight.
Towing A Trailer (Except Models
with 2.4L Engine and 4-Speed
Automatic Transaxle)
Do not tow a trailer with a Cavalier if your vehicle is:
a convertible model.
0
equipped with a 2.2L (Code 4) engine.
equipped with a manual transaxle or a three-speed
automatic transaxle.
4-43
~
&
NOTES
0Section 5
Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on theroad.
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-8
5-14
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
5-22
5-23
5-34
5-35
If a Tire GoesFlat
Changing a Flat Tire
Compact Spare Tire
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice orSnow
Hazard Warning Flashers
-
Move the switch to the right
to make your front and rear
turn signal lamps flash on
and off.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your keyis in, and even if the key isn’t in.
To turn off the flashers, move the switch
to the left.
When the hazard warning flashersare on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Your hazard warning flasherslet you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem.
Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash
on and off.
5-2
Other WarningDevices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can setone up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your battery hasrun down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
Chevrolet. But please follow the steps below to do
it safely.
I NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage
to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered
by
your warranty.
lkying to start your Chevrolet
by pushing or
pulling it could damage your
vehicle, even if you
have a manual transaxle. Andif you have an
automatic transaxle, itwon’t start thatway.
I a CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
They contain acid that can burnyou.
They contain gas that can explodeor ignite.
They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you don’t follow these stepsexactly, some or all
of these things canhurt you.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
I NOTICE:
If the other systemisn’t a 12-volt system witha
negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your Chevrolet, and the bad groundingcould
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brakefirmly on both vehicles involved
in thejump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL (N) before setting the parking brake.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter. Turn off all lamps that aren’t needed as well
as radios. This will avoid sparks and help save both
batteries. In addition, it could save your radio.
NOTICE:
If you leave your radio on,
it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries.
An electric fan can start
up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
5. Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on
each battery.
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this,
and some have been blinded.
Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough
water. You don’t
need to add water to theDelco [email protected] battery
installed in every new GM vehicle. But if a battery
has fiiier caps, be
sure the right amountof fluid is
there. If it is low, add water to takecare of that
first. If you don’t, explosive gascould be present.
Battery fluid contains acidthat can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally getit in
your eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with
water and get medical help immediately.
6. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could geta shock.
The vehicles couldbe damaged, too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
things you should know.Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) and negative (-) will go to negative (-)
or a metal engine part. Don’t connect positive (+) to
negative (-) or you’ll get a short that would damage
the battery and maybe other parts, too.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
8. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connectit
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use aremote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
7. Remove the red plasticcap, and connect the red
positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
vehicle with the dead battery. Use a remote positive
(+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
9. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (-) terminal.
Don’t let the other end
touch anything until the
next step. The other end
of the negative cable
doesn’t go to the
dead battery.
It goes to a heavy unpainted metal
pan on the engineof
the vehicle with the dead battery.
5-6
13. Remove the cables in reverse orderto prevent
electrical shorting. Takecare that they don't touch
each other or any other metal.
10. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away
from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that
move. The electrical connection is just as good
there, but thechance of sparks getting backto the
battery is much less.
11. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
12. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.
If it
won't start after a few tries, it probably needs service.
A. Heavy Metal Engine Part
B . Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
Towing Your Vehicle
Try to havea Chevrolet dealer or a professional towing
service tow your Cavalier. They can provide the right
equipment and know how to tow your vehicle without
damage. (See "Roadside Assistance" in the Index.)
If your vehicle has been changed
or modified since it
was factory-new by adding aftermarket items like fog
lamps, aero skirting, or special tires and wheels, these
instructions and illustrations may not becorrect.
Before you do anything,
turn on the hazard warning flashers.
When you call, tell the towing service:
That your vehicle cannot be towed with
sling-type equipment.
That your vehicle cannot be towed fromthe rear with
the front wheels on the ground.
That your vehicle has front-wheel drive.
e The make, model and year of your vehicle.
e Whether you can still move the shift lever.
If there was an accident, what was damaged.
When the towing service arrives, let the tow operator know
that this manual contains detailed towing instructions and
illustrations. The operator may want to see them.
When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition
key OFF. The steering wheel shouldbe clamped in
a straight-ahead position, with a clamping device
designed for towing service. Do not use the vehicle’s
steering column lockfor this. The transaxle should be in
NEUTRAL (N) and the parking brake released.
To help avoid injury to
you or others:
Never let passengers ride ina vehicle that is
being towed.
Never tow faster than safe orposted speeds.
Never tow with damaged parts not
fully secured.
Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by the tow truck.
Always secure the vehicle on each side with
separate safety chains when towing
it.
Never use J-hooks. Use T-hooks instead.
A vehicle can fall from a car carrier if it isn’t
a collision,
adequately secured. This can cause
serious personal injury and
vehicle damage. The
vehicle should be tightly secured with chains
or
steel cables beforeit is transported.
Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps,
canvas webbing, etc.) that can be cutby sharp
edges underneath thetowed vehicle. Always use
T-hooks inserted in theT-hook slots. Never use
J-hooks. They will damage drivetrain and
suspension components.
Front Towing
Before hookingup to a tow truck, be sureto read all
the information in “Towing Your Vehicle’’ earlier in
this section.
Attach T-hook chains into theslots in the bottom of the
floor pan, just behind thefront wheels, on both sides.
These slots are to be used when loading andsecuring to
car-carrier equipment.
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-type equipment
or
fascia/fog lamp damagewill occur. Use wheel-lift
or car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping
may be requiredfor car-carrier equipment, Use
safety chains and wheel straps.
Towing a vehicle overrough surfaces could
damage a vehicle. Damage can occur from vehicle
to ground orvehicle towheel-lift equipment. To
help avoid damage, installa towing dolly and
raise vehicle untiladequate clearanceis obtained
between the ground and/or
wheel-lift equipment.
Do not attach winch cables or J-hooks to
suspension components when using car-carrier
equipment. Always use T-hooks inserted in the
T-hook slots,
Attach a separate safety chain around the outboard end
of each lower control arm.
I
Before hooking upto a tow truck, be sure toread all the
information in “TowingYour Vehicle” earlier in this
section. Also besure to use the proper hookup
for your
particular vehicle.
Towing dolly required under front wheels when
equipped with automatic transmission or damage
will occur.
Attach T-hook chains on both sides in the slotted holes
in the bottom of the framerail, just ahead of the rear
wheels. These slots are tobe used when loading and
securing to car-carrier equipment.
Rear Towing
I NOTICE:
I
Place the front wheels on a towing dollyor place the
vehicle on a car carrier.
NOTICE:
Do not tow your Cavalier from the rear with
the frontwheels on the ground or your transaxle
can be damaged. Do not tow with sling-type
equipment or rear fascia
will be damaged. Use
wheel-lift or car-carrier equipment.Additional
ramping maybe required for car-carrier
equipment. Use safety chains and wheel straps.
Towing a vehicle over roughsurfaces could
damage a vehicle. Damage can occur from vehicle
to ground orvehicle to wheel-lift equipment.To
help avoid damage, installa towing dollyand
raise vehicle until adequate clearanceis obtained
between the ground and/or
wheel-lift equipment.
Do not attach winch cables or J-hooks to
suspension components when using car-carrier
equipment. Always use T-hooks inserted inthe
T-hook slots.
r
Attach a separate safety chainto each side of the axle
inboard of the rear shock absorber attachment.
(Do not
use the chainas a tie down.)
5-13
Engine Overh - -rting
will find a coolant temperaturegage and a low coolant
warning light on your Chevrolet’s instrument panel.
YOU
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from theengine if you see or hear steamcoming
from it, Just turn itoff and get everyone away
from thevehicle until itcools down. Wait until
there is no signof steam orcoolant before you
open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or
others could be badly burned. Stop your engineif
it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
I NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because
you keep
driving with no coolant, your
vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs
would not be
covered by your warranty.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes
the engine can get alittle too hot when you:
0
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
0
Stop after high-speed driving.
e Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get theoverheat warning withno sign of steam,
try this for aminute or so:
1. If you have an air conditioner, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while driving
OVERDRIVE (D) for four-speed automatic or
DRIVE (D) for three-speed automatic transaxles.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can
drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for two or three minutes while you’re parked, to see
if the warning stops. But then, if you still have the
warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out
of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
When you decide it's safe to lift the hood, here's what
you'll see:
2.4L Engine
2.2L Engine
A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
B, Electric Engine Fan
A CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start
up even
when the engine is not running and can injure
you. Keep hands, clothing andtools away from
any underhood electric fan.
5-16
-
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down.
A CAUTION:
Heater and radiatorhoses, and otherengine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. Ifyou
do, you can be burned,
Don’t run the engine
if there is a leak. If yourun
the engine, it couldlose all coolant, That could
cause an engine fire,and you could be burned.
Get any leakfixed beforeyou drive thevehicle.
NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered
by your warranty.
The coolant level should be at the FULL COLD line.
If it isn’t, you may have a leak in theradiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in
the cooling system.
If there seems tobe no leak, with the engine on, check to
see if the electric engine fan is running. If the engine is
overheating, the fan should be running.If it isn’t, your
vehicle needs service.
5-1
.
.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you haven’t founda problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean water (preferably distilled) and DEX-COOL
coolant at the coolant surgetank, but be sure thecooling
system, including thecoolant surge tankpressure cap, is
cool before you do it. (See “Engine Coolant” in the
Index for more information.)
TM
!
i’,
Steam andscalding liquidsfrom a hot cooling
system canblow out and burnyou badly. They
are underpressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap even a little they
can comeout at high speed. Neverturn the
cap when the cooling system, including
the
coolant surge tank pressure cap,
is hot. Wait
for thecooling systemand coolant surge tank
pressure cap tocool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
--
--
A CAUTION:
NOTICE:
Adding only plainwater to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol,can boil before the proper
coolant mixwill. Your vehicle’s coolant warning
system isset for the proper coolant mix. With
plain water or the wrong mix, your engine could
get toohot but you wouldn’t getthe overheat
warning, Your engine couldcatch fire and you or
others could beburned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean
water and [email protected]
In cold weather,water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. So
use the recommended coolant.
A CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts arehot
enough. Don’t spill coolant
on a hot engine.
2. Then keep turning the
pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap
when the cooling system,including the coolant surge
tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no
longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly about
one-quarter turn to the left and then stop.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.A hiss means
there is still some pressureleft.
5-20
r
3. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mix,
up to the FULL COLD mark.
1
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine andlet it run until you canfeel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine fan.
By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant
surge tank may be lower.If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mix
to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.
5-21
.
,
.
5 , Then replace the
pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is tight.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward thatside. Take yourfoot off the
accelerator pedal andgrip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently braketo
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularlyon a curve, acts much like a
skid and mayrequire the same correction you’d use ina
skid. In any rear blowout, remove yourfoot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by
steering theway you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy,but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.
If:
~~
re Goes Flat
It’s unl la1 for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especiauy if you maintain your tires properly.
If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likelyto leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,”here area few
tips about what to expect and what todo:
If a tire goesflat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
vehicle
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The
roll over you or other
can slipoff the jack and
people. You and theycould be badly injured.
To help
Find a level place to change your tire.
prevent thevehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brakefirmly.
2. Put an automatic transaxle shift lever in
PARK (P),or shift a manual transaxle to
FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain thevehicle won’t move,
you can putblocks at the front and rear
of the
tire farthestaway from the onebeing changed.
That would be the tire on the other side
of the
vehicle, at the oppositeend.
................................................................................
.................................................................................
................................................................................
...........................................
..........................................
..................
...........................................
..........................................
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
5-23
.
--. .... -........
-
-
.
.~
Removing the Spare Tireanc
. m
01s
Lift and removethe cover. See “Compact Spare Tire”
later in this sectionfor more information about the
compact spare.
Turn the wing nut
counterclockwise and
remove it. Then lift off the
adapter and remove the
spare tire.
A
..,
A
Remove thejack and wheel wrenchfrom the trunk. Your
vehicle's jack and wheel wrenchare stored in afoam
tray. Remove the band around thejack.
The tools you'll be using include thejack (A) and wheel
wrench (B).
Removing the Flat Tireand Installing the
Spare Tire
1. Using the wheel wrench,
remove the plastic nut
caps (if equipped).
2. On some models,a cover plate must be removedto
find the wheel nuts. Carefully use the wedge end of
the wheel wrenchto pry it off.
3. Then use the wheel wrenchto loosen all the wheel
nuts. Don't remove them yet.
Near each wheel wellis a notch in the frame which
the jack head fits in. The front notch is 9 inches
(23 cm) back from the front wheel well.The rear
notch is 8 inches (20cm) forward from therear wheel
well. If your vehicle hasflared side moldings, both
front and rear notches are 18 inches (46 cm) from
the wheel wells.
Position thejack and raise thejack head untilit fits
firmly into the notch in the vehicle’sframe nearest
the flat tire. Put the compact sparetire near you.
1 8 (46cm)
1 8 (46cm)
Getting undera vehicle when it is jacked upis
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack,you
could be badlyinjured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damagethe vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and
vehicle damage, be sure tofit the jack lift head into
the properlocation before raising your vehicle.
4. Raise the vehicle by rotating the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehiclefar enough off the
ground so there is enough roomfor the spare tire
to fit.
5 . Remove all of the wheel nuts.
I NOTICE:
~~
~~~
~
Do not jackor lift thevehicle using the oil pan.
Pans could crack andbegin to leakfluid.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
6. If you have a wheel cover, use yourfingers to
carefully pull the wheel coverfrom the wheel. Then
remove the flattire.
Rust or dirton thewheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could come
off and cause anaccident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places
the
where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel
to do this; but be sure use
to a scraper or wire
brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.
5-29
A
(I
I
JTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs
or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.
8. Replace the wheel nuts
with the rounded endof
the nuts toward the
wheel. Tighten each nut
by hand or with the
wheel wrench until the
wheel is held against
the hub.
I
9. Lower the vehicle by rotating the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Lower thejack completely.
10. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a criss-cross
sequence, as shown.
~~
NOTICE:
Improperly tightenedwheel nuts canlead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel
nuts in the propersequence and to the proper
torque specification.
Don’t try to puta wheel cover on your compact spare
tire. It won’t fit. Store the wheel cover and wheel nut
caps in the trunk until you have the flat tire repaire
or replaced.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose
and even comeoff. This could leadto an accident.
Be sure touse the correctwheel nuts. If you have
to replace them,be sure toget new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhereas soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened witha torque wrench to100 lb-ft
(140 N-m).
NOTICE:
Wheel covers won’tfit on your compact spare.
If
you try to puta wheel cover on your compact
spare, you could damage thecover or thespare.
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
i
i
I
I
I-\
H
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartmentof the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
L
A. Wrench
E. Extension
B.Jack
F.WingBolt
C. Flat Road Tire
G. Cover
H. Nut
D. Adapter
Store the flat tire in the compact spare tire compartment
and secure the adapter, extension (aluminum wheel
only) and wing bolt.Store the jack and wheel wrenchin
the foam tray.
5-32
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
B
A CAUTIOI!..
I
Storing ajack, a tire or other equipment
in the
passenger compartmentof the vehicle could
cause injury.In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store
all these
in the proper place.
The compact spare is for temporary use only.Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-sizetire as soon as you
can. See “Compact Spare Tire” in the Index. See the
storage instructions label to replace your compact spare
into your trunk properly.
A. Wrench
E. Wing Bolt
B. Jack
C . Spare Tire
D. Adapter
E Cover
G. Nut
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new,
it can lose air after a t h e . Check
the inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi
(420 P a ) .
After installing the compact spareon your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure your
spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is
made to perform wellat speeds up to 65 mph (105
km/h) for distances upto 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you
can finish your trip and have yourfull-size tire repaired
or replaced where you want.Of course, it’s best to
replace your spare witha full-size tire as soon asyou
can. Your spare willlast longer and be ingood shape in
case you needit again.
NOTICE:
When the compact spare is installed, don’t take
your vehicle through an automatic carwash with
guide rails. The compact spare can
get caught on
the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel,
of your vehicle.
and maybe other parts
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare
tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare
tire and its wheel together.
NOTICE:
Tire chainswon’t fit your compact spare.
Using
them can damage your
vehicle and can damage
the chainstoo. Don’t use tire chains on your
compact spare.
5-34
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
What you don’t wantto do when your vehicle is stuckis
to spin your wheels toofast. The method known as
“rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, but
you must use caution.
I NOTICE:
Spinning your wheels can destroy
parts of your
vehicle as well as thetires. If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transaxle back and
forth, you can destroy your transaxle.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
If you let your tires spin high
at speed, they can
explode, and you or others couldbe injured.
And, the transaxle or other parts
of the vehicle
can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When
you’re
stuck, spin the wheels
as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right.
That will
clear the area around your front wheels. Thenshift back
and forth betweenREVERSE (R) and a forward gear
(or with a manualtransaxle, between FIRST (1) or
SECOND ( 2 ) and REVERSE (R)), spinning the wheels
as little as possible. (If your vehicle has the Enhanced
Traction System, shift back andforth between
REVERSE (R) and FIRST (1) or SECOND (2),
spinning the wheels aslittle as possible.) Release the
accelerator pedal while youshift, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear.
If
that doesn’t get you out
after a few tries, you may need
to be towed out. If you do need to be towedout, see
“Towing Your Vehicle” inthe Index.
5-35
b%
NOTES
Section 6
Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care of your Chevrolet. This section begins with service and fuel
information, and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information
about your vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6-3
6-6
6-8
6-12
6-17
6-18
6-21
6-22
6-24
6-25
6-28
Fuel
Filling Your Tank
Checking Things Under the Hood
Engine Oil
Air Cleaner
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
(Except 2.4L Code T Engine)
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
(2.4L Code T Engine Only)
Manual Transaxle Fluid
Hydraulic Clutch
Engine Coolant
Surge Tank Pressure Cap
6-29
6-30
6-31
6-35
6-35
6-40
6-52
6-55
6-56
6-56
6-58
6-58
6-64
Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
Brakes
Battery
Halogen Bulbs
Tires
Care of Safety Belts
Cleaning Tires
Finish Damage
Underbody Maintenance
Service Parts Identification Label
Electrical System
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Service
Doing Your OwnService
,. . Work
Your Chevrolet dealer knows your vehicle best and
wants you to be happy with
it. We hope you’ll go to
your dealerfor all your service needs. You’ll get
genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported
service people.
If you wantto do some of your ownservice work, you’ll
want to use the proper Chevrolet Service Manual. It tells
you much more about how
to service your Chevrolet
than this manualcan. To order the proper service
manual, see “Service and Ownerhblications” in
the Index.
We hope you’ll wantto keep your GM vehicleall GM.
Genuine GM parts have
one of these marks:
Your vehicle hasan air bag system. Before attempting
to
do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Chevrolet” inthe Index.
You should keepa record with allparts receipts and list
the mileage qnd the date of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record’’ inthe Index.
Delco
6-2
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
You can be injured and yourvehicle couldbe
damaged if you try to do service work on
a
vehicle without knowingenough aboutit.
0 Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools beforeyou attempt anyvehicle
maintenance task.
0 Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners.“English” and “metric”
fasteners canbe easily confused. Ifyou use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt.
Things you might add tothe outside of your vehicle can
affect the aifflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check wit
your Chevrolet dealer before adding equipment
to the
outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at
87 octane or
higher. At a minimum,it should meet specifications
ASTM D4814 in the United States and CGSB
3.5-M93
in Canada. Improved gasoline specifications have been
developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers
Association (AAMA)for better vehicle performance
and engine protection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA
specification could provide improved driveability and
emission control system protection compared to
other gasolines.
Be surethe posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is
less than 87, you may geta heavy knocking noise when
you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage yourengine.
If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you
hear heavy knocking, yourengine needs service. But
don’t worry if you heara little pinging noise when
you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid
of pinging. It’s the heavy,constant knock that means
you have a problem.
If your vehicleis certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood tune-uplabel),
it is designed tooperate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If such fuels are not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance
may be affected.The malfunction indicator lamp on
your instrument panelmay turn on and/oryour vehicle
may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs, return to your
authorized Chevrolet dealer for diagnosis to determine
the cause of failure. In the eventit is determined that the
cause of the condition is the type
of fuels used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated
for low
emissions containan octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT);
ask yourservice station operator whether or not his fuel
contains MMT, General Motors does not recommend
the
use of such gasolines. If fuels containing MMT are used,
spark pluglife may be reduced and your emission
control system performance may be affected.
The
malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
Chevrolet dealer for service.
To provide cleaner air,all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent deposits from forming in yourengine and fuel
system, allowing your emission control system
to
function properly. Therefore, you should not
have to
add anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines
containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area to
help clean the air.General Motors recommends thatyou
use these gasolines if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designedfor fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use
it. It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system andalso damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the properfuel may be hard to
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any
other fuel not
recommended in the previous text onfuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an autoclub, or
contact a major oil company that
does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
You can also write us at the following addressfor
advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors International Product Center
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L l H 8P7
Filling Your Tank
The cap is behind a hinged door
on the right side of
your vehicle.
A
C A , JON:
Gasoline vaporis highly flammable.It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.
While refueling, hang the tethered
cap inside the fuel
door by placing the fuelcap strap in the strap hanger.
To take off the cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The cap has a springin it; if you let
go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right.
When you put thecap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound.
Make sure
you fully install the cap.The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
A CAUTION:
If you get gasoline on yourselfand then
something ignites it,you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on
you if you open the
fuel filler cap too quickly. Thisspray can happen
if your tankis nearly full, andis more likely in
hot weather. Open thefuel filler cap slowly and
wait for any“hiss” noise to stop.Then unscrew
the capall the way.
NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure toget the right
type. Your dealer canget onefor you. If you get
the wrong type,it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light
and your fuel tank and emissions system may be
damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline
from
painted surfaces as soon as possible.See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Chevrolet” in the Index.
6-7
,
..
..
.
Checking Things Under the Hood
A CAUTION:
An electric fan under thehood can startup and
injure you even when the engineis not running.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
I A C IUTION:
that rn can get on hot t j n e parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshieldwasher and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could be burned. Be careful not to drop spill
or
things thatwill burn onto a hot engine.
The following sections tell you how to checkfluids,
lubricants and important parts underhood.
Hood Release
To open the hood,
first pull the handle
inside the vehicle.
Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift the secondary
hood release handle.
To make sure that the secondary hood release handle
works properly,lubricate thehood latch at least once
a year.
properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the
hood and return the prop to its retainer. Lowerthe hood
8 to 10 inches (20 to 25 cm) above the vehicle and
release so that it will latch fully. Checkto make sure
the hood is closed and repeat if necessary.
6-9
-.
2.21, Engine (Code 4)
When you open the hood, you’ll see:
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
C. Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Dipstick (If Equipped)
Reservoir
D. Engine Oil Fill CapDipstick
E. Brake Fluid Reservoir
E Hydraulic Clutch Fluid
(If
Reservoir
Equipped)
Fluid
G . Air Cleaner
H. Battery
I. WindshieldWasher
2.4L Engine (Code T)
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap
C. Engine Oil Dipstick
D. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
E. Brake
Fluid
Reservoir
F. Hydraulic
Clutch
Fluid
Reservoir
Fluid
Reservoir (If Equipped)
G. Battery
H.Cleaner
Air
I. Windshield
Washer
6-11
Engine Oil
It’s a good idea to check your engine
oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the
oil must
be warm and the vehicle mustbe on level ground.
Check theoil here if you
have a 2.2L engine,
Check the oil here if you have a 2.4L engine.The
dipstick’s handle will be a yellow ring.
Turn off the engine andgive the oil a few minutes to
drain back into the oil pan.If you don’t, theoil dipstick
might not show the actual level.
Checking Engine Oil
Pull out the dipstick and cleanit with a paper towel or
cloth, then pushit back in all the way. Remove
it again,
keeping the tip down, and
check
the
level.
NOTICE:
Don’t
add
too
much
oil.
If yourenginehas
so
much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
mark that shows the proper operating range,
your engine could be damaged.
When to Add Oil
If the oil is at or below theADD mark, then you’ll need
to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This part explains what kindof oil to use.For
crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”
in the Index.
This is where you add oil if you have a 2.2L engine.
I.
What Kind of Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can
be identified by
looking for the “Starburst” symbol.This symbol
indicates that theoil has been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use anyoil which
does not carrythis Starburst symbol.
If you change your own
oil,
This is where you addoil if you have a 2.4L engine.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range.Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
be sure you use oil that has
the Starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container. If
you have your oil changed
for you, be sure theoil put
into your engineis
American Petroleum
Institute certified for
gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosityoil for your
vehicle, as shown in the following chart:
6, SELECT THE LOWEST
FOR BEST
FUEL I
my AND COLD s
SAE VISCOSITY bnMur dl1 FOR THE EXkrwurw TEMPERATURE RANGE.
~~~
LOOK
FOR '
HOT
WEATHER
/
-
~
As shown in the chart,SAE 5W-30 is best for your
vehicle. However, you can useSAE 1OW-30 if it's going
to be 0°F (- 18 C) or above.These numbers on an oil
container show its viscosity,or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils, suchas SAE 20W-50.
O
NOTICE:
\
"F
"C
+ 100-
- t 38
+80-
- +27
+60-
-
Use only engineoil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
"Starburst" symbol. Failureto use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage
not coveredby your warranty.
+16
t40- -+4
t20---7
0---la
SAL 1OW-30
GM [email protected] meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area where the temperature falls below
-20°F (-29"C), consider using eitheran SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engi
at extremely low temperatures.
I
'- 30
RED
COLD
WEATHER
00 NOT USE SAE 2OW-50 OR ANY OTHER
GRAOE OIL NOTRECOMMENDED
6-15
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anythingto your oil. Your Chevrolet dealer is
ready to advise if you think something should be added.
When to Change EngineOil
If any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/city
maintenance schedule:
e Most trips areless than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are belowfreezing.
e Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
e Most trips are through dusty
areas.
e You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.
The vehicleis used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercialapplication.
Driving under theseconditions causes engine oil to
break down sooner.If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you needto change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km)or 3 months -- whichever
occurs first.
0
If none of them is true, use the long tripbghway
maintenance schedule. Change theoil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed
engine under highway conditions causesengine oil to
break down slower.
What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that usedengine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthy
for your skin and could
even causecancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Washor properly throw
away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See
the manufacturer’s warningsabout the use and disposal
of oil products.)
Used oil can bea real threat to theenvironment. If you
change your ownoil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil
from thefilter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil
by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground,
into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If
you have a problem properlydisposing of your used oil,
ask your dealer,a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
Air Cleaner
The air cleaner is located on thedriver’s side of the
engine compartment near the battery.
To check or replace the filter, remove the screwsthat
hold the cover on andlift the cover.Be sure to reinstall
the air cleaner filter and replace thecover tightly.
Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine when to
replace the air filter.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services”in the Index.
6-17
.
<
A CAU‘LOA.:
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
(Except 2.4L Code T Engine)
Operating theengine withthe aircleaner off
can causeyou or others tobe burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans theair, it stops flameif
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there,and the
engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t
drive with it off, and be careful workingon the
engine with theair cleaner off.
When to Check and Change
A good timeto check your automatic transaxlefluid
level is when the engine oil
is changed.
Change both the fluid and
filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under
one or
more of these conditions:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches90 OF (32O C) or higher.
0
NOTICE:
When doing frequent trailer towing.
0
If the air cleaneris off, a backfire can causea
damaging engine fire. And,dirt caneasily get
into your engine, which
will damage it. Always
have theair cleaner in place when
you’re driving.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at your Chevrolet dealership
Service Department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could geta false reading on the dipstick.
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts
or exhaust system parts, starting
a fire. Be sure to
get an accurate reading you
if check your
transaxle fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have beendriving:
0
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quitea while.
0
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200"F
(82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed upby driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it's colder than 50°F (lO"C), you may have
to drive longer.
Checking theFluid Level
0
Park your vehicle ona level place. Keep the
engine running.
0
With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
0
With your foot on thebrake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
0
Let the engine run at idle for three to five mhutes.
Then, without shuttingoff the engine, follow these steps:
1. If you have a
three speed
automatic
transaxle, the
handle on the
transaxle dipstick
is a red ring.
3. Check both sidesof
the dipstick, and
read the lower
level. The fluid
level must bein the
cross-hatched area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick backin all the way.
Pull out the dipstick andwipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
How to Add Fluid
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transaxle fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
If the fluid level is low, add onlyenough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into thecross-hatched area on
the dipstick.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
(2.4L Code T Engine Only)
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally lessthan one pint
(0.5 L). Don’t [email protected]
NOTICE:
We recommend you useonly fluid labeled
[email protected], because fluid with that label
is
made especially for your automatic transaxle.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON-III
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
If you have the optional 2.4L Code T engine (see
“Engine Identification” in the Index) and an automatic
transaxle, it is not necessary tocheck the transaxle fluid
level. A transaxle fluid leak is the only reasonfor fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your Chevrolet
dealership Service Department and have it repairedas
soon as possible. You may also have your fluid level
checked by your dealer or service center when you have
your oil changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one
or more of these conditions:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90OF (32 O C) or higher.
0
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
0
When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under
any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
Manual Transaxle Fluid
When to Check
NOTICE:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
[email protected]=III,because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatictransaxle.
Damage caused by fluid other thanDEXRON-111
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
A good time to have it checked
is when the engine oil is
changed. However, the fluid in your manualtransaxle
doesn't require changing.
How to Check
Because this operation can bea little difficult, you may
choose to have this doneat your Chevroletdealership
Service Department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
I NOTICE:
1
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
of the
transaxle. Too much can mean that some
fluid could come out and fall on hot
engine parts
or exhaust system parts, startinga fire. Be sure to
get an accurate reading
if you check your
transaxle fluid.
Check the fluidlevel only when your engine is off, the
vehicle is parked on a level place and the transaxle is
cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the
transaxle case.
Then, follow these steps:
The manual transaxle
dipstick is located
below the brake master
cylinder, near the rear
of the transaxle case.
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and
clean it with a rag or paper towel.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower
level. The fluidlevel must be between theADD and
FULL marks. (Note: Fluid may appear at the bottom
of the dipstick even when the fluidlevel is several
pints low.)
2. Push it back in all theway and remove it.
4. If the fluid level is where it should be, pushthe
dipstick back in all the way and flip thehandle
down. If the fluid level is low, add more fluid as
described in the next steps.
6-23
How to Add Fluid
When to Check and Whatto Use
Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kindof fluid to use. See
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
1. Remove the dipstick by flipping the handle
up and
then pulling the dipstick out.
2. Add fluid at the dipstick hole.
Add only enough fluid to bring the fluid level up to
the FULL mark on the dipstick.
3. Push the dipstick back in allthe way; then flip the
handle down to lock the dipstick in place.
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkagein your vehicleis
self-adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoiris
filled with hydraulic clutch fluid.
It isn’t a good ideato “top off’ your clutch fluid.
Adding fluid won’t correcta leak.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
6-24
Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how
often you should check the fluid level in your clutch
master cylinder reservoir andfor the properfluid. See
“Owner Checks and Services” and “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
How to Check
0
Protect against rust and corrosion.
You do not need to check the fluid level unless you
suspect a clutch problem. To check the fluid level, take
the cap off. If the fluid reaches the step inside the
reservoir, the fluid level is correct.
0
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle isfilled
with [email protected] coolant. This coolant
is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first,
if you add [email protected] life coolant.
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
NOTICE:
I
When adding coolant, it is important that you
use only [email protected](silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL’ is added
to the system, premature engine, heater core or
The following explains your cooling system and how to add radiator corrosion may result.In addition, the
coolant when it is low.If you have a problem with engine
engine coolant willrequire change sooner at
overheating, see “Engine Overheating”in the Index.
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever
A 50/50 mixture of water and [email protected] coolant will:
occurs first. Damage caused bythe use of coolant
other than [email protected] not coveredby your
0 Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C).
new vehicle warranty.
0 Give boiling protection up to 265 “F (129°C).
--
What to Use
Use a mixtureof one-half clean water (preferably
distilled) and [email protected] which
won’t damage aluminumparts. Use GM Engine
Coolant If you use this mixture, you don’t need to add
anything else.
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water,
or some other
liquid likealcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mix will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning
system is set for the proper coolant
mix. With
plain water or the wrong
mix, your engine could
get too hotbut you wouldn’t get the overheat
warning. Your engine couldcatch fire andyou or
others could beburned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean
water and [email protected]
NOTICE:
If you use an improper coolantmix, your engine
could overheat andbe badly damaged.The
repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the
mix can freeze
and crack theengine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
[f youhave to add coolant more than four times a year,
lave your dealer check your cooling system.
NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant,you don’t have to
add extra inhibitors or additives
which claim to
improve thesystem. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
’A
CAUTIO--:
firning the surge tankbl-ssure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot
can allow steam and
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly
Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap even a
little when the engine and radiator are hot.
--
--
When your engineis cold, the coolantlevel should be at
the FULL COLD mark.
The surge tankis located on the passenger’sside of the
engine compartment.
1
If the low coolant light
comes on, it means you’re
low on engine coolant.
Adding Coolant
If you need morecoolant, add the proper [email protected]
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only whenthe
engine is cool.
Surge Tank Pressure Cap
NOTICE:
~~
A CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene
glycol,
are hot
and itwill burn if the engine parts
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
Your surge tank capis a 15 psi (105 kPa)
pressure-type cap and must
be tightly installedto
prevent coolantloss and possible enginedamage
from overheating.
When you replace your surge tank
pressure cap,
a GM cap is recommended.
Thermostat
When replacingthe pressure cap, make sure it is tight.
Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat
in the engine coolant system. The thermostat stops the
flow of coolant through theradiator until thecoolant
reaches a preset temperature.
When you replace your thermostat, [email protected]
is recommended.
How To Check Power SteeringFluid
Power Steering Fluid
I
When the engine compartmentis cool, wipe the cap and
the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap and
wipe the dipstick with a cleanrag. Replace thecap and
completely tighten it. Then remove thecap again and
look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should beat the C mark. If necessary, add only
enough fluid to bring the levelup to the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kindof fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” the
in Index.
Always use the properfluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and
seals.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessaryto regularly cneck powersteering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise.A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washerfluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use.If you will be
operating your vehicle inan area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection againstfreezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
mgrr
6-30
Open the cap labeled
WASHER FLUID ONLY.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full.
.~
-~
NOTICE:
a When usingconcentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
a Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other parts of the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
a Fill your washer fluidtank only
three-quarters full when it’s very cold. This
allows for expansion if freezing occurs,
which could damagethe tank if it is
completely full.
a Don’t use radiator antifreeze inyour
windshield washer. It can damage your
washer systemand paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is here. It is filled
with DOT-3 brake fluid.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll havetoo much
fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when workis
..
doneon the b:
‘lyd
;system.
*
A CAUTION:
have too much brake fluid,it can spill
on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine
is hot enough.You or others couldbe burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level
in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When newlinings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have
your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later your brakes won’t work well,or won’t work
at all.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on.See “Brake System Warning
Light” in the Index.
What toAdd
NOTICE:
When you do need brake fluid, use onlyDOT-3 brake
fluid -- such as Delco Supreme11 (GM Part
No. 12377967). Use new brake fluidfrom a sealed
container only.
@
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir
cap and the area
around the cap before removingit. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
0
With the wrong kindof fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work
well, or they
may not even work
at all. This could causea
crash. Always use the proper brakefluid.
6-32
~.
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such asengine
oil, in your brakesystem can damage brake
system parts so badly thatthey’ll have tobe
replaced. Don’t let someoneput in the
wrong kindof fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can
be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in
the Index.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied
or lightly
Your Chevrolet has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes. applied. This does not mean somethingis wrong with
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a your brakes.
high-pitched waming sound when the brake pads are worn See “CaliperKnuckle Maintenance Inspection” in
and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or Section 7 of this manual under PartC “Periodic
be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when Maintenance Inspections.”
you are pushing on the brake pedalf i i y ) .
Properly torqued wheel nutsare necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in t
proper sequence to GM specifications.
Brake Wear
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes won’twork well. That could leadto
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
~
Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, but
if
you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have
the rear
brake linings inspected. Also, the rear brake drums
should be removed and inspected each time the tires
are removed for rotation or changing. When you
have the front brake pads replaced, have the rear brake
inspected, too.
NOTICE:
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section7
of this manual under PartC “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections.’’
~~~
Brake Pedal Travel
Replacing Brake System Parts
See your dealerif the brake pedal does not returnto
normal height,or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This couldbe a signof brake trouble.
The braking system on a modern vehicle is complex.
Its many parts haveto be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicleis to have really good braking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
Brake Adjustment
GM brake parts. When you replace parts
of your braking
system -- for example, when your brake linings wear
Every time you make a moderate brake
stop, your disc
down
and you haveto have new ones put in
-- be sure
brakes adjustfor wear. If you rarely make a moderate or
heavier stop, then your brakes might not adjust correctly. you get new approvedGM replacement parts. If you
don’t, your brakes mayno longer work properly. For
If you drive in that way, then
-- very carefully -- make
example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong
a few moderate brake stops about every1,000miles
for your vehicle, the balance between your
front and
(1 600 km), so your brakes will adjust properly.
rear brakes can change-- for the worse. The braking
If your brake pedal goes downfarther than normal, your
performance you’ve cometo expect can change in many
rear drum brakes may need adjustment. Adjust them by other waysif someone putsin the wrong replacement
backing up and firmly applying the brakes a few times. brake parts.
6-34
-~
.
.
~
Battery
Every new Chevrolet has a Delco [email protected]
You never have to add waterto one of these. When it’s
time for a new battery, we recommenda Delco Freedom
battery. Get one that has the replacement number shown
on the original battery’s label.
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle
25 days
for or more,
take off the black, negative(-) cable from the battery.This
will help keep your battery from running down.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature’’ inthe Index.
Bulb Replacement
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your Chevrolet dealer’s service
department.
Halogen Bulbs
1 CAUTION:
I
Batteries have acidthat can burnyou and gas
that canexplode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips on working around
a battery without
getting hurt.
1
Contact your dealer to learn howto prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and
can burstif you drop or scratch the
bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
Front Exterior
Headlamps
For the typeof bulb to use, see “Replacement Bulbs” in
the Index.To replace one of your headlamp bulbs,do
the following:
2. Remove the other bolt that anchors the headlamp
assembly. Pull the headlamp assembly toward the
front of the vehicleto access the bulb assembly.
When replacing the driver’s side headlamp, twist the
bulb assembly one-eighth of a turn counterclockwise
and remove it from the headlamp assembly.
1. Remove the first bolt andcarefully pry up the shield
that covers the headlamp assembly. Be careful not to
break the fasteners that hold the shield in place.
6-36
When replacing the passenger’s side headlamp, twist
the bulb assembly one-eighthof a turn clockwise
and remove it from the headlamp assembly,
Rear Exterior Bulbs
Taillamps and Rear Turn Signal Lamps
For the typeof bulb to use, see “Replacement Bulbs” in
the Index. The followinginstructions explain how to
change each bulb.
3. Disconnect the bulb base from the socket by lifting
the plastic locking tab.
4. Snap a new bulb into the socket.
5. Replace the bulb assembly by reversing Steps
1 through 3, making sure the lower legof the
headlamp bracket is properly seatedinto the wedge
shaped retainer.
1. Pull the carpet away from therear of the trunk.
2. Remove the taillamp bulb assembly by turningit
one-quarter of a turn counterclockwise.
6-37
Back-up Lamps (Sedan)
If you have a four-door sedan,do the following to
replace a back-up lamp:
1. Use a torx screwdriverto unscrew the back-up lamp
assembly from the fascia.
2. Gently pull the bulb assemblyfrom the fascia.
by turning it
3. Remove the bulb from the socket
one-quarter of a turn counterclockwise.
4. Replace the bulb and bulb assembly by reversing
these steps.
3. To remove the bulb, pullit out.
4. Push in a new bulb.
5. Reverse all stepsto replace the taillamp assembly.
Back-up Lamps (Coupe)
If you have a two-door coupe,do the following to
replace a back-up lamp:
1. Open the trunk lid and locate the back-up lamp
assembly on the trunklid.
it
2. Gently remove the bulb from the socket by turning
counterclockwise and pulling it out.
by aligning the tabs
3. Replace the bulb in the socket
and turning clockwise.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(Models Without a Spoiler)
To change the bulb, do the following:
1. Open the trunk and view the access hole under the
rear shelf.
2. Remove the bulb sockets by rotating and pull down.
3. Remove the bulb and replace.
4. Re-install the new bulb and socket into the CHMSL.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(Models Witha Spoiler)
To change the bulb, do thefollowing:
1. Use a torx screwdriver to unscrew the bulb assembly
from the spoiler.
2. Gently pull out the bulb assembly.
3. Remove the bulb(s) by gently wiggling the bulb
from the assembly.
4. Replace the bulb(s) and reverse these steps to replace
the bulb assembly.
Interior Lamps
Dome Lamp With Integral Reading Lamps
To replace a bulb, do the following:
1. Insert a flat screwdriver into the slot at the rear
of the lens.
2. With the screwdriver, push the tab rearward to
release the lamp lens.
3. Push the lens forward to release the two tabs at the
front of the lens.
4. Gently remove and replace the bulb(s).
5. Reverse these steps to replace the lens.
Dome Lamp Without Integral Reading Lamps
To replace a bulb, do the following:
1. From the rear of the dome lamp lens, insert a flat
screwdriver between the roof trim and thelens.
2. With the screwdriver, push the tab at the rearof the
lens forward to releasethe lens.
3. Pull the lamp lensreward to release thetwo front tabs.
4. Gently remove and replace the bulb(s).
5. Reverse these steps to replace the lens.
6-39
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Tires
Your new Chevrolet comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer.If you ever have
questions about yourtire warranty and where to obtain
service, see your Chevrolet Warranty bookletfor details.
I A CAUTION:
Replacement blades come indifferent types andare
removed in different ways.For the proper type and
length, see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index.
Here’s how to remove the Sheppard’s Hook type:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from
the windshield.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly
toward the driver’sside of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
Overloading your tires can cause
overheating asa result of too much friction.
You could have an air-out and a serious
accident. See “LoadingYour Vehicle” in
the Index.
CAUTION: (Continued)
NOTICE:
0
Underinflated tires pose the same danger as
overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check
all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tiresare cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken
by a sudden
impact such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tiresat the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
--
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The Tire-Loading Information label, whichis on the
rear edge of the driver’s door,shows the correct
inflation pressures for your tires when they’recold.
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Don’t let anyonetell you that underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enoughair (underinflation),you can
get the following:
0 Too much flexing
0 Too much heat
0 Tireoverloading
Bad wear
0 Bad handling
0 Bad fuel economy.
If your tires havetoo muchair (overinflati
you can get the following:
0 Unusual wear
Badhandling
0 Roughride
0 Needless damage from road hazards.
6-41
When to Check
Check your tires once a month
or more.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at
60 psi (420 P a ) .
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gageto check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflatedeven when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
rotation is the most important.
See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services’’ in the Indexfor scheduled
rotation intervals.
n
*
I
1
Tire Inspectionand Rotation
Tires should be rotated every6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate your tires as soon
as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also checkfor damaged tiresor
wheels. See “When It’s Timefor New Tires” and
“Wheel Replacement” later in this sectionfor
more information.
The purpose of regular rotationis to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.
The first
When rotating yourtires, always use thecorrect rotation
pattern shown here.
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the
front and
rear inflation pressuresas shown on the Tire-Loading
Information label. Make certain that all wheel nutsare
properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in
the Index.
-
A CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on
a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become
loose
after a time. The wheel could comeoff and cause
an accident. When you change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from
places where thewheel
attaches to thevehicle. In anemergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure touse a scraper orwire brush later, if you
need to, to getall the rust or dirtoff. (See
“Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.)
When It’s Time forNew Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tiresis to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
You need a new tireif any of the following statements
are true:
0 You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
0 You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
0 The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep
enough to show cordor fabric.
0 The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
0 The tire has a puncture, cutor other damage that
of the size or location
can’t be repaired well because
of the damage.
Buying New Tires
CAUTION:
To find out what kind andsize of tires you need, look at
the Tire-Loading Information label.
/A
The tires installed on your vehicle when
it was new had
a Tire PerformanceCriteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that sameTPC Specnumber. That way
your vehicle will continueto have tires thatare designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service
on your vehicle.If your tires have an all-season tread
design, theTPC number will be followed by an“MS”
(for mud and snow).
Mixing tires could causeyou to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial andbias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could havea crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to yourvehicle. Be sure touse the same
size and type tires onall wheels.
It’s all right to drive with your compact spare,
though. It was developedfor use on yourvehicle.
a
If you ever replace your tires with those not having
TPC Spec number, make sure theyare the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as youroriginal tires.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
The following information relates to the system
developed by the UnitedStates National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which gradestires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The
grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger
car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system
does not applyto deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary usespare tires, tires with
nominal rim diametersof 10 to 12inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course as tire
a
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditionsof their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations
in drivinghabits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
While the tiresavailable on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to Federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Traction
-- A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
A, B, and
C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assignedto this tire is based
on braking (straightahead) traction tests anddoes not
include cornering (turning) traction.
-
6-45
Temperatul~
~~
i,
B,C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability todissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause
the
material of the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passengercar tires must meet underthe
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
B and A represent higherlevels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum requiredby law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for atire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup andpossible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at thefactory togive you the longest tirelife
and bestoverall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not
needed. However, if you notice unusual
tire wear or
your vehiclepulling one way or the other,the alignment
may need to be reset.If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving ona smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel thatis bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keepcoming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimesbe repaired). See your
Chevrolet dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should havethe same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with newGM original
equipment parts.This way, you will besure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your
Chevrolet model.
Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on yourvehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tireslose
air and makeyou lose control. You could have a
collision in which you or otherscould be injured.
Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts and
wheel nuts for replacement.
Putting aused wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t knowhow it’s been used or
how far it’s been driven.It could failsuddenly
If you have to replacea
and cause an accident.
wheel, use a new GM original equipmentwheel.
Tire Chains
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and
chassis.
If your Chevrolet has P195/65R15or P205/55R16
size tires, don’t use tire chains. They can damage
your vehicle because there is not enough clearance.
NOTICE: (Continued)
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for
more information.
NOTICE: (Continued)
Use another typeof traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for
use on your
vehicle and tiresize combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust orremove the
device if it’s contacting yourvehicle, and don’t
spin yourwheels.
If you do find tractiondevices that will fit, install
them on the front
tires.
If you have other tires,use tire chainsonly where
legal and only when you must. Use only SAE
Class “S” type chains that are the proper
size for
your tires. Install them on the front tires and
tighten them as tightly possible
as
with the ends
securely fastened. Driveslowly and follow the
chain manufacturer’s instructions.
If you can
hear the chains contacting your
vehicle, stop
and retightenthem. If the contact continues,
slow down untilit stops. Driving too fast or
spinning thewheels with chains onwill damage
your vehicle.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burstinto flame if you strike a
match or get themon a hotpart of the vehicle.Some are
dangerous if you breathe theirfumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a containerto clean your
Chevrolet, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s
warnings and instructions. And always open your doors
or windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use theseto clean your vehicle:
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
CarbonTetrachloride
Acetone
PaintThinner
Turpentine
0
LacquerThinner
NailPolishRemover
They can allbe hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle,
too.
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
Alcohol
4. Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated area
only. If you usethem, don’t saturate the stained area.
5. If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entire
area immediately or it will set.
0
Laundry Soap
0
Bleach
Using Foam-Type Cleanero
0
Reducing Agents
1. Vacuum and brush thearea to remove any loose dirt.
Cleaning the Insideof Your Chevrolet
2. Always clean a whole trim panelor section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean, damp cloth.
3. Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner following the
directions on thecontainer label.
lour Chevrolet dealer has two cleaners, a solvent-type
spot lifter and a foam-type powdered cleaner. Theywill
clean normal spots and stains very well. Do not use
them on vinylor leather.
Here are some cleaning tips:
1. Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
2. Clean up stains as soon as youcan -- before they set.
3. Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a
clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains
are stubborn.
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don’t
saturate the material and don’trub itroughly.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge
to remove the suds.
6 . Rinse the section with a clean, wet sponge.
7. Wipe off what’s left with a slightly damp paper towel
or cloth.
8. Dry it immediately with a blow dryer.
9. Wipe with a clean cloth.
6-49
Using Solvent-Type Cleaner on Fabric
Fabric Protection
First, see if you have to use solvent-typecleaner at all.
Some spots and stains will clean off better with just
water and mild soap.
Your Chevrolet has upholsterythat has been treated with
Scotchgard” Fabric Protector, a 3M product. It protects
fabrics by repelling oil and water, which arethe carriers
of most stains. Even with this
protection, you still need
to clean your upholstery
_. often to keep it lookingnew.
If you need to usea solvent:
w
1. Gently scrape excess soil from the trim material with
a clean, dull knifeor scraper.
A
a
~
Further informationon cleaning is available by calling
1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6167).
2. Use very little cleaner, lightpressure and clean cloths
(preferably cheesecloth). Cleaning should start at the
outside of the stain, “feathering” toward the center.
Special Cleaning Problems
Greasy or Oily Stains
3. Keep changing toa clean section of the cloth.
Stains caused by grease,oil, butter, margarine, shoe
polish, coffee withcream, chewing gum, cosmetic
creams, vegetable oils, wax crayon, tar and asphalt can
be removed as follows:
4. When you cleana stain from fabric, immediately
dry the area with a blow dryer to help preventa
cleaning ring.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Follow the solvent-type instructions described earlier.
Shoe polish, wax crayon, tar and asphalt will
stain if left
on a vehicle’s seat fabric. They shouldbe removed as
soon as possible. Becareful, because thecleaner will
dissolve them and maycause them to spread.
6-50
... -
Non-Greasy Stains
Cleaning Vinyl
Stains caused by catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit
juice, milk, soft drinks, wine, vomit, urine and blood can
be removed as follows:
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
mav have to do it morethan once.
d
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructions
described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a waterbaking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. If needed, clean lightly with solvent-type cleaner.
Combination Stains
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed asfollows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allowto dry.
3. If a stain remains, clean it with solvent-type cleaner.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you
don't get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth anda
vinymeather cleaner. Seeyour dealer forthis product.
(I I :.ning the Top of the Instrum(- 'anel
~
~~
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes maycause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make itdifficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
I
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
If’you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and
lukewarm water.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Cleaning the Outside of the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax,
sap or other material may be on the blade or ‘windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Windshield
Cleaner, Bon
Powder (non-scratching glass cleaning
powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The windshieldis clean if
beads do not form when you rinse it with water.
A
m
i
@
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinsethe blade with water.
Check the wiper blades andclean them as necessary;
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner (GM replace blades that look worn.
Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner
will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust
films on
Weatherstrips
interior glass.
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
Don’t use abrasive cleaners onglass, because they may
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone
cause scratches. Avoid placingdecals on the inside rear
grease with a clean cloth at least every
six months.
window, since they may haveto be scrapedoff later.
During very cold, damp weather more frequent
If abrasive cleaners are used on
the inside of the rear
application may be required. (See “Recommended
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)
Any temporary license should not be attached
across the
defogger grid.
6-52
Cleaning the Outsideof
Your Chevrolet
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your Chevrolet
by hand may be necessaryto remove residuefrom the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning
products from your dealer.(See “Appearance Care and
Materials” in the Index.)
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it Your Chevrolet has a “basecoatklearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth andgloss to the colored
clean by washingit often with lukewarm or cold water.
basecoat. Always use waxes andpolishes that are
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
non-abrasive and madefor a basecoatklearcoat
Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use
paint finish.
liquid hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soaps.
Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
NOTICE:
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on
the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a
Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on
soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid
a basecoatklearcoat paint finish may dull the
surface scratches and water spotting.
finish or leave swirl marks.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning ExteriorLampsLenses
Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a liquid
hand, dish or vehicle washing (mild detergent) soap to
clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions
under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
6-53
Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’sfinish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon aspossible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe forpainted surfacesto remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemicalfallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your Chevrolet garagedor covered
whenever possible.
Cleaning Your Convertible Top
Your convertible top shouldbe cleaned often.If you use
an automatic car wash, useone with waterjets and
hanging cloths. High pressure car washes maycause
water toenter your vehicle.
When you hand wash the top,
do it in partial shade.
Use a mild soap, lukewarm water anda soft sponge.
A chamois or cloth may leave lint on the top, and a
brush can chafe the threads in thetop fabric. Don’t use
detergents, harsh cleaners, solvents or bleaching agents.
When you clean the top, put
one hand underit to
support it. Wet the entire vehicle and wash the top
evenly to avoid spots or rings. Let thesoap remain on
the fabric for a few minutes. Whenthe top is really dirty,
use a mild foam-type cleaner. Thoroughlyrinse the
entire vehicle, then let the top dry indirect sunlight.
To protect the convertible top:
0
After you wash the vehicle, make sure the topis
completely dry before you
lower it.
0
Don’t get any cleaner on the vehicle’s paintedfinish;
it could leavestreaks.
If you decide to go through an automaticcar wash,
ask the managerif the equipment could damage
your top.
Before entering a car wash, setthe climate control to
VENT andthe fan control tothe highest speed.This will
help to prevent water underhigh pressure from entering
around the convertible top.
6-54
..
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
(If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel.
A wax may then beapplied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or
abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could
damage the surface.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care t
wipe off any overspray or splash from
all painted
surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.
Petroleum-based products may damage the
paint finish.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Finish Damage
ChemicPaintSpotting
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode
quickly and maydevelop into a major repair expense.
Some weather andatmospheric conditions can create
a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle.
This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and smallirregular dark spots etched
into the paint surface.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from yourdealer or other service
outlets. Larger areasof finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals usedfor ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody.If these are not
removed, acceleratedcorrosion (rust) can occur on
the underbody parts such asfuel lines, frame, floor
pan and exhaust system even though they have
corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and otherdebris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do
this for you.
6-56
Although nodefect in thepaint job causes this,
Chevrolet will repair, at no charge
to the owner, the
surfaces of new vehicles damagedby this fallout
condition within 12 months or 12,000miles (20 000 km)
of purchase, whichever occurs first.
Appearance Care Materials Chart
6-57
-.
i
.
. .;
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
-r
information
r
1111111111111 lli 11111111llllllllllll1111
-SAMPLE4UXVM072675
C
E N G l N E A 9 7
CODE
MODEL YEAR
the model designation,
paint
0
_- ~~
J
.ASSEMBLY
PLANT
and
a list of all production options and
special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed fromthe vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-on Electrical Equipment
This is the legal identifier for your Chevrolet.It appears
on a plate in the front corner of the instrumentpanel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield fromoutside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears onthe Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VINis the engine code. This
code will help you identify yourengine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on your spare tire cover. It’s very
helpful if youever need to order parts. On this label is:
your VIN,
6-58
I
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electricalto your Chevrolet
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’tbe covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working
as
they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anythingelectrical to your Chevrolet,see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Chevrolet” in the Index.
Headlamp Wiring
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses. Should your
headlamps fail to function, have your headlamp system
checked right away.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of damage caused by electrical problems.
Windshield Wiper Fuse
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers in the fusepanel protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette
lighter -- and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the instrument
panel fuse block and the engine compartment
fuse block.
6-59
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The fuse panel is located under the left end of the
instrument panel.To open, push the tabon the access
door to the left and pull the
door forward. Makesure to
insert the tabs when replacing
the cover.
Fuse
TURN-B/U
F/P-INJ
CLUSTER
CLS/PCM
RR DFOG
0 2 HTR
Usage
Exterior Lamps, Back-up Lamps
Fuel Pump, Fuel Injectors
Instrument Cluster, Anti-Lock
Brake System
Instrument Cluster, Powertrain
Control Module, Daytime
Running Lights
Rear Window Defogger
Multiport Fuel Injection
Fuse
WIPER
ERLS
AIR BAG
EXT LAMP
PWR ACC
HVAC
RADIO
ALARM
CRUISE
L HDLP
CIG
Usage
Windshield Wipers,
Windshield Washers
Automatic Transaxle, Brake
Transaxle Shift Interlock, A/C
Compressor, Cruise Control,
Multiport Fuel Injection
Supplemental Inflatable
Restraint System
Exterior Lamps, Instrument
Panel Lights
Power DoorLocks, Convertible
Top (Convertible Model)
Heater and A/CControl,
Anti-lock Brake System,
Engine Cooling Fan
Radio, Remote Keyless Entry
Alarm Module - Interior Lamps,
Warning Chimes
Cruise Control
Left Headlamp
Cigarette Lighter, Horn, Interior
Lamps, Diagnostic Connector
Fuse
INST LPS
STOP HAZ
PWR WINDOW
PCM/IGN
INT LAMP
FOG LAMP
IGN
R HDLP
Usage
Instrument Panel Lights,
Warning Chimes
Exterior Lamps, Anti-Lock
Brake System, Cruise Control,
Turn Signals
Power Windows, PowerSunroof,
Convertible Top Controls
(Convertible Model)
(Circuit Breaker)
Powertrain Control Module
Alarm Module: Illuminated Entry,
Warning Chimes, Overhead
Lamps, Mapmeading Lamps,
Glove Box Lamp, Trunk Lamp,
Radio, Power Mirrors, Remote
Keyless Entry
Fog Lamps (2-24 Only)
Engine Ignition
Right Headlamp
6-61
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
P
The engine c o m p m e n t fuse block is located on the
driver’s sideof the engine compartment. Lift off the
cover to checkthe fuses.
Fuse
IGN
BATT 1
BATT 2
ABS
Usage
Ignition Switch Circuits
Power ACC/Stoplamp Circuits
Lighting Circuits
Electronic Variable Orifice
Steering, Anti-Lock Brake System
COOLING FAN Engine Cooling Fan
Heater and A/C Blower
BLO
Powertrain Control Module
PCM
A/C Compressor
AIC
ABS/EVO
Anti-Lock
Brake
System
GEN
Voltage
Gen
Sensor
(2.2L Engine)
LAMPS
PS
Replacement Bulbs
OUTSIDE
Back-up Lamps .........................
3057
Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamps
BaseModel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3357
2-24Model .........................
3357NA
Center High-Mount Stoplamp
Inside ................................
1141
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 12
Halogen Headlamps
High/Low Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005/6
TaiVTurn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Turn Signal Lamps (Rear Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . 3057
INSIDE
Domemeading Lamp (If Equipped)
Front .................................
168
Rex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
194
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English
and metric conversions.Please refer to “Recommended
Huids and Lubricants” in the Index for more information.
Engine Crankcase . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 quarts (3.8 L)
Automatic Transaxle (4-Speed Automatic
Transaxle Not Owner Serviceable)
Pan Removal and Replacement . . . 7.4 quarts (7.0 L)
After Complete Overhaul . . . . . . . 10.0 quarts (9.5 L)
When draining or replacing torque converter;
more fluid may be needed.
Manual Transaxle
Complete Drain and Refill . . . . . . . 2.0 quarts (1.9 L)
Cooling System
2.2L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 quarts (9.8 L)
2.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7 quarts (10.1 L)
Refrigerant (R=134a),
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . See refrigerant charge
label under hood.
Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2 gallons (57.5 L)
Tire Pressures, Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . See Tire-Loading
Information label on driver’s door.
Wheel Nut Torque .......... 100 lb-ft (140 Nem)
NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be
sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in
this manual.
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Not all airconditioning refrigerants are the same.If the
air conditioning system in yourvehicle needs
refrigerant, be sure the properrefrigerant is used. If
you're not sure, ask your Chevrolet dealer.
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Air Cleaner Element
2.2L .......................
2.4L .......................
Engine Oil Filter
2.2L
2.4L
..........................
..........................
AC Type A- 11 72C
ACTypeA-1172C
AC Type PF-47
AC Type PF-44
Spark Plugs
2.2L .........................
AC Type 41-928
Gap: 1.52 mm (0.060 inch)
AC Type 41-910
2.4L .........................
Gap: 1.52 mm (0.060 inch)
Windshield Wiper Blade (Sheppard's Hook Type)
Left Side .....................
22 inches (56 cm)
Right Side. ................... 17 inches (43 cm)
2.2L Engine Specifications
VIN Engine Code ...........................
4
L4
Type ....................................
Horsepower .............................
120
1-3-4-2
Firing Order ..........................
Thermostat Temperature ........... 180" F (82°C)
2.4L Engine Specifications
VIN Engine Code ...........................
T
Type ....................................
L4
150
Horsepower .............................
1-3-4-2
Firing Order ..........................
ThermostatTemperature ........... 180O F (82 O C)
Dimensj
Length
Coupe ................ 180.3 inches (458.0 cm)
Sedan ................. 180.3 inches (458.0 cm)
Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . 180.3 inches (458.0 cm)
Width
Coupe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75.4 inches (191.6 cm)
Sedan .................. 75.4 inches (19 1.6 cm)
Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75.4 inches (19 1.6 cm)
Height
Coupe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53.2 inches (135.1 cm)
Sedan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54.9 inches (139.4 cm)
Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53.9 inches (136.9 cm)
Wheelbase
Coupe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104.1 inches (264.4 cm)
Sedan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104.1 inches (264.4 cm)
Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . 104.1 inches (264.4 cm)
Front Tread
Coupe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57.6 inches (146.2 cm)
Sedan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57.6 inches (146.2 cm)
Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57.6 inches (146.2 cm)
Rear Tread
Coupe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56.8 inches (144.2 cm)
Sedan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56.8 inches (144.2 cm)
Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56.8 inches (144.2 cm)
,@% NOTES
0 Section 7
MaintenanceSchedule
This section covers the maintenance required for your Chevrolet. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-4
7-4 1
7-4 1
7-4 1
7-42
7-43
Introduction
Your Vehicle andthe Environment
How This Section is Organized
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
Selecting the Right Schedule
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
At EachFuel Fill
At Least Once a Month
At Least Twice a Year
At Least Once a Year
7-46
7-46
7-46
7-46
7-46
7-47
7-47
7-48
7-50
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection
Exhaust System Inspection
Radiator and Heater Hose Inspection
Throttle Linkage Inspection
Brake System Inspection
CaliperKnuckle Maintenance Inspection
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Part E: Maintenance Record
I
Introduction
IMPORTANT-
Your Vehicle and
KEEP ENGINE OIL
'AT THE PROPER
LEVEL AND CHANGE AS
RECOMMENDED
Plan
protection
I
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty andOwner Assistance booklet, or your
Chevrolet dealer for details.
7-2
~~
~
-
~
~vironment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps
to keep your
vehicle ingood working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance
can even
affect the qualityof the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflationcan increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle.
To help protectour
environment, and to keep your vehicle good
in
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
How This Section is Organized
The remainder of this section is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services”shows
what to havedone and how often.Some of these
services can becomplex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service department
or another qualified
service centerdo these jobs.
’A
CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work ona vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can
be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the required know-how
and the proper tools and equipment for the
job.
If you have any doubt, havea qualified
technician do thework.
If you are skilled enoughto do some work on your
vehicle, you will probably wantto get the service
information GM publishes. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
“Part B: Owner Checks andServices’’ tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good conditio
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”explains
important inspections that your Chevrolet dealer’s
service departmentor another qualified service center
should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”lists
some productsGM recommends to help keep your
vehicle properly maintained. These products,
or their
equivalents, should be used whether you do the work
yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” provides a place for
you to record the maintenance performed
on your
vehicle. Whenever any maintenanceis performed, be
sure to write it down in thispart. This will help you
determine when your next maintenance should be done
In addition,it is a good idea tokeep your maintenance
receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle f
warranty repairs.
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know
exactly how you’ll driveit. You may drive very short
distances onlya few timesa week. Or you may drive
long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or
you may driveit to work, to do errandsor in many
other ways.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed
in Part D.
Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these.
All
parts should be replaced andall necessary repairs done
before you or anyone else drives the vehicle.
These schedules arefor vehicles that:
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Tire-Loading Information label. See “Loading
Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
use the recommended fuel.See “Fuel” in the Index.
Because of all the different ways people use their
GM
You may even need
vehicles, maintenance needs vary.
Selecting the Right Schedule
more frequent checks and replacements than you’ll find
First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules
is
in the schedules in this section.
So please read this
right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which
section and note how you drive.
If you have any
schedule to follow:
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your Chevrolet dealer.
This part tellsyou the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them.
If you
go to your dealerfor your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using genuine
GM parts.
Maintenance Schedule
(Short Trip/City Definition
Follow the Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule if any
one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:
0
Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
e Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
0
Most trips are through dusty areas.
0
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle. (Withsome models, you should never
tow a trailer. See “Towing a Trailer’’ in theIndex.)
e If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if
you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions
is that these conditions cause engine oil to break
down sooney.
Short Trip/City Intervals
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil andFilter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Chassis Lubrication
(or 6 months, whichever occurs first). Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Inspection, if driving in dustyconditions.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Replacement. Fuel Tank, Cap andLines Inspection.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Inspection
(2.2L Code 4 engine only).
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditions only).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive BeltInspection.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure tofollow the complete maintenance schedule
on the following pages.
Maintenance Schedule
ILong Trip/Highway Definition
I 1 Long Trip/Highway Intervals
Follow this maintenance scheduleonly if none ofthe
conditions from theShort Trip/City Maintenance
Schedule is true. Do not use this scheduleif the vehicle
is used for trailer towing, drivenin a dusty areaor used
off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City schedule for
.theseconditions.
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under
highway conditions causes engine oil to break
down slower.
Every 7,500 Miles (12500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
Chassis Lubrication (or every12 months, whichever
occurs first).Tire Rotation.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Exhaust Gas
Recirculation (EGR) System Inspection (2.2L Code
4
engine only). Air Cleaner Filter Replacement. Fuel
Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection.
Every 50,000 Miles (83000 km): Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditions only).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection.
Every 100,000 Miles(166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.
Every 150,000 Miles (240000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule
on the following pages.
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km)should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km)at thesame intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performedat
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
# Lubricate the suspension and steering linkage.
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
your brake calipers may require additional inspection
and service, at every other tire rotation. See
“Caliper/Knuckle Maintenance Inspection’’ under
“Periodic Maintenance Inspections’’ in Part C of
this schedule.
Footnotes
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board hasdetermined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
+ A good time to check your
brakes is during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspection” in Part C of this schedule.
++ If you drive in a highly corrosive environment,
7-7
--
... .
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
9,000 Miles (15000 km)
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-9
I
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
15,000 Miles (25 000 h---
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
‘
El Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission ControlService.
0Inspect air cleanerfilter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replacefilter if
necessary. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote?.)
I
DATE
1
ACTUALMILEAGE
ISERVICED
BEI
Lubricate chassis components (or every
6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
6 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote+.)
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
ISERVICED
BEI
S)hort
1
Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
21,000 Miles (35 000 km)
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or
0Change eng---e oil and filter (or every
every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
17 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-11
~~
~~
~-
I Short Trip/City MaintenanceSchedule I
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
6 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote#.)
0Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0Inspect Exhaust Gas Recirculation(EGR)
system (2.2L Code 4 engine only).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
33,000 Miles (55000 km)
0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote T.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
An Emission Control Service.
I
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY
7-13
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedu
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whicheverOCCUTS first).
39,000 Miles (65000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An EmissionControl Service.
0Lubricate
chassis components (or every
6 months, whicheveroccurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)
I
DATE
7-14
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
1
I
I
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
42,000 Miles (70 000 km)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
0Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving
6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information,
(See footnote c.)
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if
necessary. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote-t.)
I
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-15
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change automatictransaxle fluid and filter
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
6 months, whichever occurs firs ‘
(See footnote#.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)
DATE
7-1
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
if the vehicle is mainlydriven under one or
more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularlyreaches 90 O F
(32O C) or higher.
I ShortTrip/CityMaintenanceSchedule I
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
-
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, thefluid andfilter do
not requirechanging.
Manual transaxle fluid doesn’t
require change.
I
DATE
I
ACTUALMILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
b
7-17
1
Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule
I
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
D Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whicheveroccurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
b o r t Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
3 months, whichever occurs first).
or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0Inspect Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
system (2.2L Code 4 engine only).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote-f..)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
0Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
7-19
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whicheveroccurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An EmissionControl Service.
~
I
DATE
7-20
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
Lubricate chassis components (or every
6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission. Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
6 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
1SERVICED BY: I
I
I
I
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
3 months, whicheveroccurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replacefilter if
necessary, An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote?.)
DATE
7-2-
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
6 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
W
S
h
o
r
t Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
Short Tkip/City Maintenance Schedule
87,000 Mile: ,‘I45000 km)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engineoil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occl
3
3 months, whichever occurs first).
f
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
DATE
7-2
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
*
~~
~
._
.
~~
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
0Replace air cleaner filter.
El Inspect Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
system (2.2L Code 4 engine only).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote ?.)
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
I
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
F-,000Miles (155000 km)
96,000 Miles (140 000 km)
7 Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service,
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
6 months, whicheveroccurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)
~~
DATE
7-26
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
ISERVICED
BY:^
I
ShortTrip/CityMaintenanceSchedule
I
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or
0Inspect spark plug wires (except 2.4L Code
every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
T engine). An Emission Control Service.
0Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
0Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where theoutside
temperature regularlyreaches 90 OF
(32°C) or higher.
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
(Continued)
7-27
I
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
100,000 Miles (166 000 km) (Continued)
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such asfound in taxi, police or
delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under anyof these
conditions,thefluid andfilter do not requirechanging.
Manual transaxlefluid doesn’t
require change.
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
- -.
SERVICED BY:
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
Drain, flush and refill cooling system
(or every60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine
Coolant’’ in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap and neck.Pressure test cooling
system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I LongTrip/HighwayMaintenanceSchedule I
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km)should be performedat
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
Footnotes
f The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
# Lubricate the suspension and steering linkage.
+ A good time to check your
brakes is during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule.
++ If you drive in a highly corrosive environment,
your brake calipers may require additional inspection
and service, at every other tire rotation. See
“CalipedKnuckle Maintenance Inspection” under
“Periodic Maintenance Insnections” in Part C of
this schedule.
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
7-29
I LongTrip/HighwayMaintenanceSchedule I
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whicheveroccurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components(or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information,
(See footnote +.)
t
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
Lubricate chassis components(or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
1
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
30,000 Miles (50000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)
0Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
(Continued)
7-31
Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
I
30,000 Miles (50 000 km) (Continued)
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
0Inspect fuel tank, cap and
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
lines for damage
or leaks. Inspectfuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote f.)
0Inspect Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
system (2.2L Code 4 engine only).
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission ControlService.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whicheveroccurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” inthe Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
An Emission ControlService.
I
I
DATE
7-32
1
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I Long Trip/Highway MaintenanceSchedule I
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)
1
DATE
I
ACTUALMILEAGE
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90O F
(32°C) or higher.
SERVICED BY:^
(Continued)
7-33
1Long
1
Schedule
Trip/Highway
Maintenance
50,000 Miles (83 000 km) , -”- nued)
~
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as foundin taxi, police or
delivery service.
-
~
52,500 Miles (87500 km)
0Change
engineoil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission ControlService.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
conditions, the cfluidandfilter do not require changing.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Manual transaxlefluid doesn’t
Rotation” in the Index
for proper rotation
require change.
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
If you do not useyour vehicle under anyof these
L
DATE
I
7-34
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
Long TriplHighway daintenance Schedule I
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
0Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
0Change engine oil and filter (or
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)
0Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
or leaks. Inspectfuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0Inspect Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
system (2.2L Code4 engine only).
An Emission Control Service. (See fOOtn0teT.)
:
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
7-3f
Long TriplHighway Maintenance Schedule
1
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
every
12 months, whicheveroccurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components(or every
Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
I
DATE
7-36
I
1
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
ISERYICED By:J
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or
12 months, whichever occurs first).
every
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Confrol Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ inthe Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
(Continued)
7-37
Long TriplHighway Maintenance Schedule
I
90,000 Miles (150 000 km) (Continued)
0Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
or leaks. Inspectfuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replaceparts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0Inspect Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
system (2.2L Code 4 engine only).
An Emission Control Service.
[7 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)
DATE
7-38
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedmr:
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or
0Inspect spark plug wires (except2.4L Code
every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
T engine). An Emission Control Service.
0Replace spark plugs.
An Emissiolg.Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
An Emission Control Service.
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
I
DATE
I
ACTUALMILEAGE
ISERVICED
0Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where theoutside
temperature regularly reaches90O F
(32 O C) or higher.
BY:I
(Continued)
7-39
bung Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km) (Continued)
0Drain, flush and refill cooling system
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
-
(or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine
Coolant” in the Indexfor what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the
cooling system and pressure cap.
I f you do not useyour vehicle under any of these
conditions, thefluid andfilter donot require changing.
Manual transaxle fluid doesn’t
require change.
I
I
DATE
An Emission Control Service.
1
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
I
1
I
I
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Engine Coolant Level Check
Listed below are owner checks and services which
should be performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety,dependability and emission control
performance of your vehicle.
Check the engine coolant level and add coolant mixture
if nec :ssary. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for
further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
At :ach FuelFill
It is importantfor you or a service station attendant to
per3cor-m these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.
.I
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washerfluid level in the
windshield washertank and addthe proper fluid if
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index
for further details.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures. See
“Tires” in theIndex for further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the Index
for further details.
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Lookfor any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety beltsystem from doing its job, have it
repaired. Have anytorn or frayed safety beltsreplaced.
Automatic Transaxle Check
(Except 2.4L Code T Engine)
Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed.See
“Automatic Transaxle” inthe Index. A fluid loss
may indicate a problem. Checkthe system and repair
if needed.
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper bladesfor wear or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or
miss areas of the windshield. Alsosee “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
Automatic Transaxle Inspection
(2.4L Code T Engine Only)
If you have the optional2.4L Code T engine (see
“Engine Identification” in the Index) and an automatic
transaxle, it is not necessary to checkthe transaxle fluid
level. A transaxle fluid leak is the only reasonfor fluid
loss. Check for leaks. If a leak occurs, take the vehicleto
your Chevrolet dealership Service Department andhave
it repaired as soon aspossible. You may also have your
fluid checkedby your dealeror service center when you
have yourengine oil changed.
Manual Transaxle Check
Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed. See
“Manual Transaxle” in the Index. Check
for leaks. A
fluid loss may indicate a problem. Have the system
inspected andrepair if needed.
Hydraulic Clutch System Check
Check thefluid level in the clutch reservoir. See
“Hydraulic Clutch Fluid” inthe Index. A fluid loss in
this system couldindicate a problem. Have the system
inspected and repaired atonce.
Also lookfor any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repairedor replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regularmaintenance.)
At Least Once a Year
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking
Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the
regular brake.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all body door and rear compartment hinges.
Also lubricate all hinges and latches, including those for
the primary andsecondary hood latches, glove box door,
console door and any folding seat hardware. Part D tells
you what to use. More frequent lubrication may be
required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Starter Switch Check
A CAUTION:
_.
7
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly.If it does, youor others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
NOTE: Do not use theaccelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. On automatic transaxle vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The starter should work only in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).If the starter works in
any other position, your vehicleneeds service.
On manual transaxle vehicles, put the shift lever in
NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway and
try to start the engine. The starter should work only
when the clutch is pushed down all the way tothe
floor. If the starter works whenthe clutch isn’t
pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service.
Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock (BTSI) Check
(Automatic Transaxle)
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition keyto LOCK in each shift lever position.
With an automatic transaxle, the key should turn
to
LOCK only when the shift
lever is in PARK (P).
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake”
in the Indexif necessary).
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle beginsto move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift leverofout
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI
needs service.
0
With a manual transaxle, the key should turn
to LOCK only when the shift lever
is in
REVERSE (R).
On vehicles with a key release button, try to turn the key
to LOCK without pressing the button.
The key should
turn to LOCK only when you press the key button.
On all vehicles, the key should
come out only in LOCK.
Turn the steering wheelto the left andto the right.It
should only lock when turned to the right.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
PARK (P)
Mechanism Check
IA
Park on a fairly steephill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping yourfoot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others couldbe
injured and propertycould be damaged.Make
sure thereis room in frontof your vehicle in case
it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake atonce should thevehicle begin to move.
0
To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL
(N),
slowly removefoot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicleis held by the parking
brake only.
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shiftto PARK (P). Then
release all brakes.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain waterto flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take
care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed below are inspections and services which should
be performed at least twice a year (for instance, each
spring and fall).You should let yourGM dealer’s
service department or other qualified service center
do
these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.
Proper proceduresto perform these servicesmay be
found in aGM service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect thefront and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, looseor missing parts, signsof
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hosesfor proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot sealsfor damage, tears or leakage. Replace
seals if necessary.
I
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system.Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as wellas open seams,
holes, loose connectionsor other conditions which could
cause a heat build-up in the floor pan
or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle.See “Engine Exhaust’’
in the Index.
Radiator and Heater Hose Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced
if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed.
Throttle Linkage Inspection
Inspect the throttle linkagefor interference or binding,
and for damage or missing parts. Replace parts
as
needed. Replace any cables that have high effort
or
excessive wear.Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise
control cables.
ke System Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc.Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings
for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including
drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.
Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have
your brakesinspected more often if your driving habits
or conditions result in frequent braking.
CalipedKnuckle Maintenance Inspection
If you operate your vehicle ina highly corrosive
environment, as indicated by the shaded areas on
the map following this text, your vehicle may require
additional brake service. Refer to the appropriate
GM Service Bulletin for the proper caliper inspection
procedure. As necessary,caliper pins and knuckle brake
pad abutments should be lubricated at every other tire
rotation. Also, see your GM dealer’s service department
or qualified service center for additional information.
7-47
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
USAGE
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification may be obtainedfrom your
GM dealer.
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines “Starburst”
symbol of the proper viscosity. To
determine the preferred viscosity
for your vehicle’sengine, see
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
50/50 mixture of clean water
(preferably distilled) and use only
GM [email protected]
or [email protected]
coolant. See “Engine Coolant”
in the Index.
Coolant
Supplement
Sealer
GM Part No. 3634621 or
equivalent with acomplete flush
and refill.
Hydraulic Brake
System
Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967 or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid).
@
Hydraulic Clutch Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GMPart
System
No. 12345347 or equivalent
DOT-3 brake fluid).
Power Steering
System
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,
1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).
Manual
Transaxle
Synchromesh Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. 12345349
or equivalent).
Automatic
Transaxle
[email protected] Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
TM
TM
FLUID/LUBRICANT
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose lubricant, [email protected]
(GM Part No. 12346241
or equivalent).
Manual
Transaxle Shift
Linkage
Chassis lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Clutch Linkage
Pivot Points
Engine oil.
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent)
or lubricantmeeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Windshield
Washer Solvent
GM [email protected] Solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515)
or eauivalent.
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate lubricant aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and
Door Hinges
Multi-purpose lubricant, [email protected]
(GM Part No. 12346241
or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. 12345579 orequivalent).
See “Replacement Parts” in the Index for recommended
replacement filters and spark plugs.
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the
date, odometer reading and who performed the
service
in the boxes provided afterthe maintenance interval.
Any additional information from “Owner Checks and
Services” or “Periodic Maintenance”can be addedon
the following record pages. Also, you should retain all
maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio
is a convenient place tostore them.
Maintenance Record
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
Maintenance Record
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENA
~~
-
PERFORN
D
-
7-51
Maintenance Record
JNTENANCE PERFORMED
0Section 8
CustomerAssistance Infa- mation
Here you willfind out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain
service publications and how to report any safety defects.
8-2
8-4
8-5
8-7
8-8
8-9
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users
Chevrolet/Geo Roadside Assistance Program
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Courtesy Transportation
GM Participation in an Alternative Dispute
Resolution Program
8- 10
8- 10
8-11
8-11
8-11
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
Ordering Service and OwnerPublications
in Canada
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Chevrolet dealers have thefacilities, trained technicians
and up-to-date information to promptly address any
concerns you may have. However,if a concern has not
been resolvedto your complete satisfaction, take the
following steps:
STEP ONE -- Discuss yourconcern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at thatlevel. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the
Sales, Service or Parts
Manager, contact the ownerof the dealership or the
General Manager.
STEP TWO -- If after contacting amember of
In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994
dealership management, it appears
your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without further
help, contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center by calling 1-800-222- 1020.
In Canada,
contact GM of Canada Customer Communication
Centre in Oshawaby calling 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
For help outside of the United States and Canada, call
the following numbers as appropriate:
In Mexico: (525) 625-3256
0
In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-75 1-41 35
(English) or 1-800-751-4136 (Spanish)
In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009
0
In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British
Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-0 122
In all other Caribbean countries: (809) 763- 1315
In other overseas locations, call GM International
Product Center in Canada at: (905) 644-41 12.
In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
8-3
____
_
For prompt assistance, pleasehave the following
information availableto give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
0
0
0
Your name, address, home and business
telephone numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
from the vehicle registrationor title, or the plate at
the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
Nature of concern
We encourage you tocall us so we can give your inquiry
prompt attention. However,if you wish to write
Chevrolet, address your inquiry to:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
In Canada, write to:
General Motorsof Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information bookletfor addresses of
GM Overseas offices.
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved in the dealership,
using the dealer’s facilities, equipment and personnel.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
Customer Assistancefor Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers whoare deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user
can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV. (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Chevrolet/Geo Roadside
Assistance Program
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1 -800-243-8872). This toll-free number will provide
you over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor
mechanical problems.If your problem cannot be
resolved over the phone,our advisors have access to a
nationwide network of dealer recommended service
providers. Roadside membership is free, however some
services may incur costs.
Roadside offers two levelsof service to the customer,
Basic Care and Courtesy’” Care:
Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA
Free towing for warranty repairs
Basic over-the-phone technical advice
Available dealer services at reasonable costs (ie.,
wrecker services, locksmith/key service, glass
repair, etc.)
To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer
satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the
establishment of the Chevrolet/Geo Roadside Assistance
Center. As theowner of a 1997 Chevrolet/Geo,
membership in Roadside Assistance is free.
8-5
ROADSIDE Cuurtesy Care PROVIDES:
TM
Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined above)
Plus:
FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer
from a legal roadway)
FREE LocksmithKey Service (when keys are lost
on the roador locked inside)
FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road)
FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)
FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on
the road)
Chevrolet/Geo offers Courtesy TransportationTor
customers needing warrantyservice. Courtesy
Transportation willbe offered in conjunction with
the coverage providedby the Bumper to Bumper
New Vehicle Limited Warranty toeligible purchasers
of 1997 Chevrolet/Geo passengercar and light duty
trucks. (Please see your selling dealer for details.)
Note: Courtesy Careis available to Retail and Retail Lease
Customers operating 1997 and newer Chevrolet/Geo
vehicles for a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60OOO km),
whichever occurs first. All Courtesy Careservices must
be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer
Service Management.
Basic Care and Courtesy Cure are not part of or
included in the coverage providedby the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevroletreserves the right to
modify or discontinue Basic Careand Courtesy Care
at any time.
For complete program details, see your Chevrolet/Geo
dealer to obtain a Roadside Assistance Center brochure.
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that
will provide you with quality and priority service. When
roadside services are required, our advisors will explain
any payment obligations that may be incurred for
utilizing outside services.
For prompt assistance when calling, please have the
following available to give to the advisor:
Please refer to the Roadside Assistance brochure
inside your ownerinformation portfolio for full
program details.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an
extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
separate brochure provided by the dealer or call
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
License plate number
0
Vehicle color
0
Vehicle location
Telephone number where you can be reached
0
Vehicle mileage
0
Description of problem
8-7
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet/Geo offers Courtesy Transportation for
customers needing warranty service. Courtesy
Transportation will be offered
in conjunction with the
coverage provided by the Bumper to Bumper New
Vehicle Limited Warrantyto retail purchasers of
1997 Chevrolet/Geo passenger cars and light duty
trucks (please see your selling
dealer for details).
Courtesy Transportation includes:
0 One way shuttle ridefor any warranty repair
completed during the same day.
0
0
0
Up to $30 maximum daily vehicle rental allowance
for any overnight warranty repair up to five days,
OR
Up to $30 maximum daily cab, bus or other
transportation allowance in lieuof rental for any
overnight warranty repair upto five days, OR
Up to $10 daily fuel allowance for rides provided by
another person (i.e., friend, neighbor, etc.)in lieu of
five days.
rental for any overnight warranty repair up to
Note: All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will
be administered by your Chevrolet/Geo dealer
service management. Claim amounts should reflect
all actual costs.
Chevrolet/Geo Courtesy Transportationis not part
of the Bumperto Bumper New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Chevrolet/Geo reserves the right
to make
any changesor discontinue Courtesy Transportation
at any time without notification.
0 For additional program details, contact your
Chevrolet/Geo dealer.
Some state insurance regulations makeit impractical to
rent vehicles to people under 21 years
of age. If you are
under 21 and have difficulty renting a vehicle, Chevrolet
will reimburse up to $30/day
for documented
transportation you receive.
For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle
Coverage period in theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty,
interim transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your
dealer for details. The Roadside Assistance program is
available only in the United States and Canada.
0
In Canada,please consult yourGM dealer for
information on Courtesy Transportation.
GM Participation in an Alternative
Dispute Resolution Program
This program is available in all50 states and the
District of Columbia. Canadian ownersrefer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP). General Motors reserves the right to
change eligibility limitations andor to discontinue its
participation in this program.
Both Chevrolet and your Chevrolet dealer are committed
to IIliiking sure you are completely satisfied with your new
vehicle. Our experience has shown that,if a situation
arises where you feel your concern has not been
adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
described earlier in this section is very successful.
There may be instances where an impartial third party
can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement
regarding vehicle repairs or interpretation of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.To assist in resolving these
disagreements, Chevrolet voluntarily participates in
BBB AUTOLINE.
BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program
administered by the Better Business Bureau systemto
settle automotive disputes. This program is available
free of charge to customers whocurrently own or lease a
GM vehicle.
If you are not satisfied after following the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure, you may contact the BBB using
the toll-free telephone number, or write them atthe
following address:
BBB AUTOLINE
Council of Better Business Bureaus,Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
To file a claim, you will be asked to provide your name
and address, your VehicleIdentification Number (VIN)
and a statement of the nature of your complaint.
Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and
other factors.
8-9
We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Procedure before you resortto AUTO LINE, but you
TO THE UNITED STATES
may contactthe BBB at any time.The BBB will attempt
to resolve the complaint serving as an intermediary.
If
GOVERNMENT
this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
be scheduled where eligible customers may present their cause a crashor could cause injuryor death, you should
case to an impartial third-party arbitrator.
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition
to
The arbitrator will makea decision which you may
notifying General Motors.
accept or reject. If you accept the decision,GM will be
bound by that decision.The entire dispute resolution
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,it may open an
procedure should ordinarily take about
40 days from the
investigation, andif it finds that a safety defect exists in
time you file a claim until a decisionis made.
a groupof vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
Some state laws may require you
to use this program
before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration program
or in the courts. For further information, contactthe
BBB at 1-800-955-5 100 or the Chevrolet Customer
Assistance Centerat 1-800-222- 1020.
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer
or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you mayeither call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area)or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety fromthe Hotline.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
Box 8880
Ottawa, Ontario K1G 352
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-222- 1020 or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, Michigan 48007-7047
In Canada, please call usat1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Ordering Serviceand Owner
Pub:
Ins in Canada
Service manuals, service bulletins, owner’s manuals and
other service literature are available for purchase for all
current and past modelGeneral Motors vehicles.
The toll-free telephone number for ordering information
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
1997 CHEVROLET/GEO SERVICE PUBLICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering
the operation and servicingof your vehiclecan be purchased by filling
out
the Service Publication Order Form in this book
and mailing it in with your check, money order,
below.)
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1997 CHEVROLET/GEO
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$90.00
OWNER'S INFORMATION
Owner publications are written directly for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about the
vehicle. The owner's manualwill include the Maintenance
Schedule for all models.
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
1997 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$40.00
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner's Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$1 5.00
Without Portfolio: Owner's Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$1 0.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Publications are available for current and past
Service Bulletins give technical service information needed model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please
to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks. specify year and model name
of the vehicle.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist
in the
diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWNON
THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:
Helm, tncorporated P.O.Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM Eastern Tme
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA-MasterCard-Discover)
Orders will be mailed within 10 days
of receipt. Please allow ade uate time for postal
service. If further mformatlon is needed, write to the address s own below or call
1-800-782-4356. Material cannot
be returned for credit without packing slip with retu
1-800-782-4356
informationwlthln 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee maybe applied
(Monday-Friday8:OO AM - 6:OO PM EST)
against the orlglnal order.
FAX Orders Only1-313-865-5927
VEHICLE MODEL
PUBLICATION FORM
TOTAL
PRICE
ITEM DESCRIPTION
QTym
NUMBER
EACH"
PRICE
YEAR
NAME
ORDER TOLL FREE
R
(NOTE: f o r Credit Card Holders Only)
1:
9
9
7
Manual
Repair
Service
Car & Light Truck
Transmlsslon
Unit
Portfolio
In
$40.00
1997
Manual
Owner's
1997
$15.00
1997 Portfolio
Without
Manual
Owner's
G'
$10.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
~-~ NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the Check or Money
name ofthe person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Order payable to
Mail completed order formto:
Helm, Inc. (USA funds
HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
only do nut send cash.)
For purchases outsideU.S.A. please writeto the above address for quotation.
(CUSTOMER'S
(ATTENTION)
NAME)
(STREET ADDRESSNO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
(CITY)
(ZIP CODE)
0
DAYTIME
TELEPHONE
NO.
AREA CODE
*L
GM-CHE-ORD97Pricesaresubject
to changewithoutnoticeandwithoutincurring
o ligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)
~~
P
A
Y
M
E
N
T
-
0
Mastercard
n
VISA
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted
in U S . funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payablein U.S. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add$11.50 plus the
U.S. order processing.
&
NOTES
0Section 9
Index
Adapter Kit. CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3- 17
1-22
AirBag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-26
How Does it Restrain ..........................
How it Works ................................
1-24
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-24
1-23.2-68
Readiness Light .........................
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-27
What Makes it Inflate ..........................
1-25
What Will You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1-25
When Should it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17
3-5
AirConditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Conditioning Refrigerants .....................
6-64
Alignment and Balance. Tire ......................
6-46
Aluminum Wheels. Cleaning ......................
6-55
Antenna. Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-25
Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70. 4-7
4-7
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 1
Anti-Theft. Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AppearanceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-48
Appearance Care Materials .......................
6-57
8-9
Arbitration Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-50
Audio Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Audio Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
Auto-Down Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-32
Automatic Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-22
Automatic Transaxle
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
6-18. 6-21
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GearPositions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-18
7-45
Park Mechanism Check ........................
Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
B a c k - u p Lamps Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
Replacement.KeylessEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-45
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
BBB Auto Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-9
Better Business Bureau Mediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
4-26
Blizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-34
Fluid .......................................
6-31
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 1
Parking .....................................
2-26
PedalTravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Replacing System Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
System Warning Light .........................
2-69
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Transaxle Shift InterlockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Wear .......................................
6-33
Brakes, Anti-Lock ............................... 4-7
Braking ........................................
4-6
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 10
Break-In, NewVehicle ..........................
2-12
Brightness Control ..............................
2-44
BTSICheck ................................... 7-44
6-35
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-38
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
6-39
Dome Lamp .................................
RearTurnSignal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Taillamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
BypassSwitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
8-7
Canadian Roadside Assistance ....................
Capacities and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
CarbonMonoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27.2.28.4.30. 4.39
7-41
Cassette Deck Service ...........................
Cassette Tape Player .......................
3- 10. 3.13
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
CDAdapterKit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
CDCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-25
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Theft-Deterrent Feature ........................
3-21
Center Console Storage Area ......................
2-48
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Bulb Replacement. . . . 6-39
Center Rear Passenger Position ....................
1-33
Certification Label ..............................
4-34
Chains.Safety .................................
4-40
Chains.Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-48
Changing a Flat Tire.............................
5-23
Check Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
2-77
Check Gages Light ..............................
Checking Your Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
6-56
Chemical Paint Spotting..........................
ChildRestraints ................................
1-37
Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position. . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Securing in the Passenger Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Securing in the Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
1-38
TopStrap ...................................
WheretoPut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
2-50
CigaretteLighter ...............................
Circuit Breakers and Fuses .......................
6-59
Cleaner. Air ...................................
6-17
Raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-58
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-49
Raising Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-59
AluminumWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-55
Removing
the
Boot
...........................
2-56
Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Convex Outside Mirror ..........................
2-48
Exterior LampLenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-25
Fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Heater.Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
GlassSurfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-52
5-16
SurgeTank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inside of Your Chevrolet .......................
6-49
Surge Tank Pressure Cap .......................
6-28
InstrumentPanel .............................
6-51
Cooling
System
................................
5-16
Outside of Your Chevrolet ......................
6-53
Courtesy Transportation ...........................
8-8
Special Problems .............................
6-50
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-38
Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-50
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-48
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-55
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Vinyl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-51
Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-55
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ....................
8-2
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Climate Control System, Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Climate Control System with Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . 3-3
Damage. Finish ...............................
6-56
Clock, Setting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
Damage.
Sheet
Metal
............................
6-55
Clutch Fluid, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-24
Daytime
Running
Lamps/Automatic
Light
Control
.
.
.
.
2-42
Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Dead
Battery
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-3
Comfort Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 1
Defects.
Reporting
Safety
........................
8-10
Compact Disc Adapter Kit ........................
3-17
4-2
DefensiveDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Disc Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-25
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-7
Defogger.
Rear
Window
3-17
Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defogging
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-7
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3-7
Defrosting .....................................
Compact Spare Tire .............................
5-34
Dimen
ions.
Vehicle
............................
6-65
Control of a Vehicle ..............................
4-6
8 B Noise
Dolby
Reduction
.......................
2-49 3-16
ConvenienceNet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dome
Lamp
Bulb
Replacement
.................... 6-39
Convertible Top
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
DoorLocks
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-54
Drive.
Automatic
Transaxle
.......................
2-21
2-53
Installing the Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-13
Driver
Position
Lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-52
2-59
Lowering Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5 1
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
Driving
City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Defensive ....................................
4-2
Drunken .....................................
4-2
Freeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
InaBlizzard .................................
4-28
In Foreign Countries ...........................
6-5
In the Rain ..................................
4- 18
Night ......................................
4-16
OnCurves ..................................
4-10
On Grades While Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
On Hill and Mountain Roads ....................
4-24
OnSnowandIce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Throughwater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
WetRoads ..................................
4-18
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
With a Trailer ................................ 4-40
DrunkenDriving ................................
4-2
E a s y Entry Seat ................................
1-6
Electrical Equipment. Adding ...... 2-15.2-16.3-23. 6-58
6-58
Electrical System ...............................
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10. 6-11
6-25
Coolant .....................................
Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 17
Coolant Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41
Coolant Temperature Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Exhaust .....................................
2-30
6-62
Fuse Block ..................................
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
7-41
OilLevelCheck ..............................
5-14
Overheating .................................
Manual
Language
Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Specifications ................................
6-64
Starting Your ......................
2.14.2.15. 2.16
Engineoil ....................................
6-12
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Checking ...................................
6-13
Used .......................................
6-16
6-14
What To Use .................................
When to Change ..............................
6-16
Enhanced Traction System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Enhanced Traction System Active Light . . . . . . . . . 2.72.4.9
Enhanced Traction System Warning Light . . . . . . . 2.71.4.9
Ethanol ........................................
6-5
ETS Active Light ...........................
2.72.4.9
ETS Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.71. 4.9
Exhaust. Engine ................................
2-30
6-49
Fabric Cleaning ...............................
Fifth Gear. Manual Transaxle .....................
2-24
Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Filter. Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17
Finishcare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
6-56
Finish Damage .................................
First Gear. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21.2.23
2-24
First Gear. Manual Transaxle ......................
Flashers. Hazard Warning .........................
5-2
Flat Tire. Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
FOgLmps ....................................
2-43
6-5
Foreign Countries. Fuel ...........................
Fourth Gear. Manual Transaxle ....................
2-24
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
French
Front Reading Lamps ............................
2-45
1.
FrontTowing ..................................
Fuel ..........................................
Filling Your Tank ..............................
Gage .......................................
In Foreign Countries ...........................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers .......................
.
5-10
6-3
6-6
2-78
6-5
6-59
Gages
2-72
Engine Coolant Temperature ....................
Fuel .......................................
2-78
Speedometer .......................
2-64.2-65. 2.66
2.65.2.67
Tachometer .............................
GAWR .......................................
4-34
Gear Positions. Automatic Transaxle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 19
Gear Positions. Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................
4-34..
Guide
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-35
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
1-5
HeadRestraints .................................
Headlamps ....................................
2-42
BulbReplacement ............................
6-36
High/Low Beamchanger ......................
2-35
2-42
OnReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring .....................................
6-59
Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
3-5
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Beam Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4-24
Hill and Mountain Roads .........................
.
Hitches. Trailer .................................
4-39
Hood
Checking Things Under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Prop ........................................
6-9
Release ......................................
6-8
Horn .........................................
2-32
Hydraulic Clutch ...............................
6-24
Fluid .......................................
6-24
System Check ................................
7-42
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
2-12
Ignition Positions ..............................
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check ....................
7-44
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
6-41
Inflation, Tire ..................................
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Inspections
Brakesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Caliper/Knuckle ..............................
7-47
ExhaustSystems ............................. 7-46
Front-Wheel-Drive Axle Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Front-Wheel-Drive Axle Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
7-46
Radiator and Heater Hose ......................
.
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
7-46
Suspension ..................................
Throttle Linkage ..............................
7-46
Installing the Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
InstrumentPanel ...............................
2-62
Brightness Control ............................
2-44
Cleaning ....................................
6-51
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64, 2-65
6-60
FuseBlock ..................................
Interior Lamps .................................
2-44
BulbReplacement ............................
6-39
9-5
Jack.Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Jump Starting ...................................
5-3
K e y Lock Cylinders Service .....................
7-43
Key Release Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Keyless Entry System ............................
2-6
2-2
Keys ..........................................
Labels .......................................
4-33
4-34
Certification .................................
Service Parts Identification .....................
6-58
Tire-LoadingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Lamps ........................................
2-41
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
2-43
Fog ........................................
2-45
FrontReading ................................
2-44
Interior .....................................
Map .......................................
2-45
2-42
OnReminder ................................
Latches. Seatback ................................
1-5
2-6
Leaving Your Vehicle .............................
Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running . . . . . . . 2-28
2-50
Lighter .......................................
Lights
Air Bag Readiness . . . . . i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23. 2-68
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . 2.70.4.7
Brake System Warning .........................
2-69
2-69
ChargingSystem .............................
2-73
CheckEngine ................................
CheckGages ................................
2-77
Enhanced Traction System Active . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.72.4.9
Enhanced Traction System Warning Light . . . . . 2.71.4.9
ETS Active ..............................
2.72.4.9
ETSWarning ............................
2.71.4.9
Interior .....................................
2-44
Low Coolant Warning .........................
2-73
Oil Pressure Warning ..........................
2-76
2-77
Passlock Warning ...........................
Safety Belt Reminder ......................
1.8.2.68
2.25.2.77
Up-Shift ...............................
4-33
Loading YourVehicle ...........................
Locks
Cylinders ...................................
7-43
Door ........................................
2-4
Key Lock Cylinder Service .....................
7-43
PowerDoor ..................................
2-5
Rear Door Security .............................
2-5
Steering Column Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-44
Trunk ......................................
2-10
2-73
Low Coolant Warning Light ......................
Lowering the Convertible Top Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Lowering Your Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
7-48
Lubricants and Fluids ............................
Lubrication Service. Body ........................
7-43
TM
Maintenance. N O ~ ZReplacement
~ I
parts . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
MaintenanceRecord ............................
7-50
7-1
Maintenance Schedule ............................
Long Trip/Highway Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-6
Long TripMighway Intervals .....................
7-41
Owner Checks and Services .....................
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-5
Short TripKity Definition .......................
7-5
Short TripKity Intervals ........................
Maintenance. Underbody .........................
Maintenance When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Lumbar Support ..........................
Manual Remote Control Mirror ....................
Manual Transaxle
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid .......................................
Gear Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convex Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inside Daymight Rearview .....................
Manual Remote Control ........................
Power Remote Control .........................
MountainRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multifunction Lever .............................
6-56
4-43
2-73
1-2
1-3
2-47
7-42
6-22
2-23
2-23
2-23
2-14
6-5
2-46
2-48
2-46
2-47
2-47
4-24
2-33
.................... 2-20
Neutral. Automatic Transaxle
Neutral. Manual Transaxle ........................
New Vehicle “Break-In” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nightvision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-24
2-12
4-17
Odometer ....................................
Odometer. Trip .................................
Off-Road Recovery .............................
Oil. Engine ....................................
Oil Pressure Warning Light .......................
Overdrive. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-66
2-66
4- 12
6-12
2-76
2-22
Overheating Engine .............................
Owner Checks and Services .......................
Owner Publications. Ordering .....................
5-14
7-41
8-12
6-56
P a i n t Spotting. Chemical ........................
Park
Automatic -:ansaxle ..........................
2-19
Shifting Into .................................
2-27
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-29
Parking
AtNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Brake Mechanism Check .......................
7-45
Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-11
Over Things That Burn ........................
2-30
With a Trailer ................................
4-42
Your Vehicle. Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Passenger Position ....................
1-22. 1-28. 1-33
Passing .......................................
4-13
With a Trailer ................................
4-40
Passlock ” ....................................
2-11
Passlock” Warning Light ........................
2-77
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Power
DoorLocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
6-59
OptionFuses ................................
2-47
Remote Control Mirror ........................
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10.6.29
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-32
Pregnancy. Use of Safety Belts ....................
1-21
5-1
Problems on the Road ............................
Publications. Service and Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
9-7
R a d i o Reception ..............................
3-23
Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Rain. Driving In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1 8
Raising the Convertible Top Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
2-58
Raising Your Convertible Top .....................
Rear
2-5
Door Security Locks ...........................
1-28
Outside Seat Position ..........................
Safety Belt Comfort Guides .....................
1-3 1
Seatpassengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-28
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
WindowDefogger .............................
3-7
Rear Towing ...................................
5- 12
Rear Turn Signal Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Rearview Mirror. Inside Daymight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Reclining Front Seatbacks .........................
1-4
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
4-3 1
Recreational Vehicle Towing ......................
Refrigerants.AirConditioning ....................
6-64
2- 10
Remote Trunk Release ...........................
Removing the Boot .............................
2-56
Replacement
6-63
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-64
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-46
Replacing Safety Belts ...........................
1-48
8-10
Reporting Safety Defects .........................
Restraints
1-48
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-37
1-5
Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
7-42
Systemcheck ................................
2-20
Reverse. Automatic Transaxle .....................
Reverse. Manual Transaxle .......................
Right Front Passenger Position ....................
Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roadside Assistance. Canadian .....................
Rocking YourVehicle ...........................
Rotation.Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-48
Safety Belt Extender ............................
SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7
Adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13
Care .......................................
6-52
Center Rear Passenger Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Children ....................................
1-35
Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-48
How to Wear Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13
IncorrectUsage ....................
1-17.1-46. 1-47
LapBelt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-34
1- 13. 1-28
Lap-Shoulder ...........................
LargerChildren ..............................
1-45
Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22.1-28. 1-33
1-12
Questions and Answers ........................
Rear Comfort Guides ..........................
1-31
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Rear Seat Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-28
ReminderLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8.2-68
1-48
Replacing After a Crash ........................
Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1-35
Smaller Children and Babies ....................
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1-8
WhyTheyWork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SafetyChains .................................. 4-40
9-8
~~
-..-?..rr-.......i_..i
...
........
.
.... ..,.. -.. ...........
2-24
1-22
8-5
8-7
5-35
6-42
. . .
...._.L.*%.L.........
"lCi
....................
?.I
.........
SafetyDefects.Reporting ........................
8-10
Safety Warnings and Symbols .......................
vi
Scheduled Maintenance Services ....................
7-3
Seatback
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5
1-4
RecliningFront ...............................
Seats
EasyEntry ...................................
1-6
ManualFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-3
Manual Lumbar Support ........................
1-6
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1- 1
Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seatcontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Securing a Child Restraint ......................
1-39
Second Gear. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21. 2-22
Second Gear. Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Security System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2- 11
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Bulletins, Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 12
Manuals, Ordering ............................
8- 12
Parts Identification Label .......................
6-58
Publications, Ordering .........................
8- 12
6-2
Work, Doing Your Own .........................
6-1
Service and Appearance Care ......................
Service and Owner Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 12
Publications. Ordering in Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Service Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8- 12
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Chevrolet . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Sheet Metal Damage ............................
6-55
Shift Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2- 19, 2-23
Shiftspeeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Shifting
2- 19
Automatic Transaxle ..........................
Into Park (P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-27
Manual Transaxle .............................
2-23
2-29
OutofPark ..................................
1-16
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .....................
SignalingTurns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-34
Skidding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Sound Equipment. Adding ........................
3-23
Spare Tire. Compact .............................
5-34
Specifications and Capacities ......................
6-63
Specifications.Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-64
Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-66
SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-22
Stains. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-50
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-43
Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14.2-15. 2- 16
Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10
In Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
4-10, 6-29
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-33
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-35
Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Sunvisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-50
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-51
Supplemental Restraint System ....................
1-22
Surge Tank, Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Surge Tank PressureCap .........................
6-28
...
Symbols,Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vm
Tachometer ..................................
2-67
Taillamp Bulb Replacement .......................
6-37
TapePlayerCare ...............................
3-24
Theft .........................................
2-10
Theft-Deterrent Feature. CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
THEFTLOCK ..................................
3-21
6-28
Thermostat ....................................
Third Gear. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Third Gear. Manual Transaxle .....................
2-24
Tilt Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Time. Setting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Tirechains ....................................
6-48
TireLoading ...................................
4-33
Tire-Loading Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Tires .........................................
6-40
Alignment and Balance ........................
6-46
Buying New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
6-48
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23
ChangingaFlat ..............................
Cleaning ....................................
6-55
5-34
Compact Spare ...............................
Inflation ....................................
6-41
7-41
Inflation Check ...............................
6-42
Inspection and Rotation ........................
Loading ....................................
4-33
6-41
Pressure ....................................
6-46
Temperature .................................
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
6-45
Treadwear ...................................
6-45
Uniform Quality Grading .......................
6-47
Used Replacement Wheel ......................
Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
6-46
Wheel Replacement ...........................
When It’s Time for New .......................
6-43
B-10
-
-
TopStrap .....................................
1-38
TorqueLock ...................................
2-28
Torque. Wheel Nut .........................
5.31.6.63
Towing
Front .......................................
5-10
Rear .......................................
5-12
Recreational Vehicle ..........................
4-31
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.36.4.40
Towing Your Vehicle .............................
5-8
Towing Your Vehicle From the Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Towing Your Vehicle From the Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Trailer
4-41
Backing Up .................................
Brakes .....................................
4-40
Driving on Grades ............................
4-42
Driving with .................................
4-40
FollowingDistance ...........................
4-40
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Maintenance When Towing .....................
4-43
4-41
Making Turns ................................
4-42
ParkingonHills ..............................
Passing .....................................
4-40
4-40
Safety Chains ................................
Tongueweight ...............................
4-38
4-39
Total Weight on Tires ..........................
4.36.4.40
Towing ................................
Turnsignals .................................
4-41
4-38
Weight .....................................
Transaxle
6.18.6.21
Automatic ..............................
6-22
Manual .....................................
Transmitters. Keyless Entry ........................
2-6
8-8
Transportation.Courtesy ..........................
TripOdometer .................................
2-66
TrunkLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-10
TTYUsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4
Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Turn SignalMultifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
7-45
Underbody Flushing Service .....................
UnderbodyMaintenance .........................
6-56
2.25.2.77
Up-Shift Light ............................
Vehicle
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Damage
..............................
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IdentificationNumber .........................
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visors. Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6..
vi1
6-65
6-58
4-33
6-35
3-6
2-50
5-3
W a r n i n g Devices ...............................
Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
6-30
Washer Fluid. Windshield ........................
Washing Your Vehicle ...........................
6-53
6-53
Weatherstrips ..................................
Wheel
6-46
Alignment ..................................
Nut Torque .............................
5-31. 6-63
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
6-47
Used Replacement ............................
5-25
Wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows ..................................... 2-32
2-32
Auto-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
2-37
WindshieldWasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-37. 6-30
7-41
Fluid Level Check ............................
2-35
WindshieldWiper ..............................
7-42
Bladecheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-40
BladeReplacement ...........................
Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Wiring.Headlamp ..............................
6-59
WreckerTowing ................................
.5-8
Wrench. Wheel .................................
5-25
9-11
~~
Service Station Checkpoints
COOLANT
SURGE TANK
P6-26
2.4 L ENGINE
OIL DIPSTICK
P6-12
FUEL DOOR
WINDSHIELD
FLUID RESERVOIR
P6-30
BATTERY
RELEASE
TIRES
P5-22
P6-35
REMOTE TRUNK RELEASE
(IF EQUIPPED) P2-10
For detailed information, referto the page number listed, or see the Indexin the back of the owner's manual.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement